Pioneer SUPER TUNER 3 D AVIC Z120BT User Manual
Operation Manual  
FLASH MEMORY MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION  
RECEIVER  
AVIC-Z120BT  
AVIC-X920BT  
Notice to all users:  
This software requires that the navigation system is  
properly connected to your vehicle’s parking brake and  
depending on your vehicle, additional installation may  
be required. For more information, please contact your  
Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at  
(800) 421-1404.  
Be sure to read Important Information for the User  
first!  
Important Information for the User includes the  
important information that you must understand before  
using this navigation system.  
English  
Contents  
– Searching for a city name first 34  
– Finding the location by specifying the  
house number 35  
– Searching for a name by entering  
multiple keywords 36  
– Registering a location by  
“Favorites” 46  
– Registering a location by scroll  
mode 46  
Editing registered locations 46  
– Editing the entry in the “Favorites”  
list 46  
Setting up a route to your home 36  
Searching for Points of Interest (POI) 36  
– Searching for POIs by preset  
categories 36  
– Editing your home 47  
– Sorting the entry in the “Favorites”  
list 47  
– Deleting the entry from the “Favorites”  
list 48  
– Searching for a POI directly from the  
name of the facilities 37  
– Searching for a nearby POI 37  
– Searching for POIs around the  
destination 38  
Exporting and importing “Favorites”  
items 48  
– Searching for POIs around the city 38  
Selecting destination from “Favorites” 39  
Searching for POIs by using the data on the  
SD memory card 39  
Selecting a location you searched for  
recently 39  
– Exporting “Favorites” items 48  
– Importing the “Favorites” items 49  
Deleting the entry from the “History” list 49  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
Activating the service 50  
– Checking your product key 50  
– Subscribing to the MSN Direct  
service 51  
Searching for a location by coordinates 40  
After the location is decided  
Setting a route to your destination 41  
– Display multiple routes 41  
– Activating the MSN Direct  
function 51  
Browsing gas prices 51  
Browsing movie times 52  
– Searching for a theater by selecting a  
movie title 52  
– Searching for a movie title by selecting  
a theater 53  
Browsing weather information 54  
– Checking the local weather  
information 54  
Checking and modifying the current  
route  
Displaying the “Route Overview” screen 42  
Modifying the route calculation  
conditions 42  
– Items that users can operate 42  
Checking the current itinerary 43  
Editing waypoints 44  
– Adding a waypoint 44  
– Deleting a waypoint 44  
– Sorting waypoints 45  
– Checking worldwide weather  
conditions 54  
– How to read MSN Direct information  
on the map 54  
Canceling the route guidance 45  
Using traffic information 55  
– Checking all traffic information 55  
– Checking traffic information on the  
route 56  
Registering and editing locations  
Storing a location in “Favorites” 46  
3
En  
Contents  
– How to read traffic information on the  
map 56  
Receiving a phone call 71  
– Answering an incoming call 71  
Transferring the phone book 72  
– Deleting registered contacts 73  
Changing the phone settings 73  
– Editing the device name 73  
– Editing the password 73  
– Stopping Bluetooth wave  
transmission 73  
– Viewing the traffic flow 57  
– Setting an alternative route to avoid  
traffic congestion 58  
– Selecting traffic information to  
display 59  
Browsing local events 59  
Browsing news headlines 60  
Browsing stock quotes 61  
– Selecting stock symbols 61  
– Viewing the detailed stock quotes 61  
– Deleting registered stocks 62  
– Echo canceling and noise  
reduction 74  
– Answering a call automatically 74  
– Setting the automatic rejection  
function 74  
– Clearing memory 75  
– Updating the Bluetooth wireless  
technology software 75  
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth  
device  
Preparing communication devices 63  
Registering your Bluetooth devices 63  
– Searching for nearby Bluetooth  
devices 63  
Notes for hands-free phoning 75  
Basic operations of the AV source  
Displaying the AV operation screen 77  
– Selecting a source 77  
– Pairing from your Bluetooth  
devices 64  
Operating list screens (e.g. iPod list  
screen) 77  
– Searching for a specified Bluetooth  
device 65  
– Switching between the AV operation  
screen and the list screen 77  
– Selecting an item 78  
– Deleting a registered device 66  
Connecting a registered Bluetooth  
device 66  
– Returning to the previous display 78  
– Setting for priority connecting 67  
Using the radio (FM)  
Starting procedure 79  
Reading the screen 79  
Using hands-free phoning  
Displaying the Phone Menu 68  
Making a phone call 68  
Using the touch panel keys 80  
– Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies 80  
Using the “Function” menu 81  
– Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies 81  
– Direct dialing 68  
– Making a call home easily 69  
– Calling a number in the “Contacts  
List” 69  
– Dialing from the history 69  
– Dialing GOOG-411 70  
– Dialing the entry stored in the  
“Favorites” list 70  
– Tuning in strong signals 81  
Using the radio (AM)  
Starting procedure 83  
– Dialing a facility’s phone number 70  
– Dialing from the map 71  
4
En  
Contents  
Reading the screen 83  
– Searching for a specific scene and  
starting playback from a specified  
time 100  
– Direct number search 100  
– Operating the DVD menu 100  
– Using DVD menu by touch panel  
keys 100  
Using the touch panel keys 84  
– Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies 84  
Using the “Function” menu 85  
– Stores the strongest broadcast  
frequencies 85  
– Tunes in strong signals 85  
– Frame-by-frame playback 101  
– Slow motion playback 101  
Using the “Function” menu 101  
HD Radioä reception  
Starting procedure 86  
Reading the screen 86  
Playing a DivX video  
Using the touch panel keys 87  
– Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies 87  
Starting procedure 103  
Reading the screen 103  
Using the touch panel keys 104  
– Frame-by-frame playback 105  
– Slow motion playback 105  
– Starting playback from a specified  
time 106  
Switching the display 88  
– Scrolling the detailed information 88  
Using the “Function” menu 88  
– Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies 88  
Using the “Function” menu 106  
– Switching the seek mode 89  
– Tuning in strong signals 89  
– Switching the reception mode 89  
DVD-Video or DivX setup  
Displaying DVD/DivX® Setup menu 107  
Setting the top-priority languages 107  
Setting the angle icon display 107  
Setting the aspect ratio 107  
Setting the parental lock 108  
– Setting the code number and  
level 108  
Playing audio CDs  
Starting procedure 90  
Reading the screen 90  
Using the touch panel keys 91  
Using the “Function” menu 92  
Setting the auto play 109  
Setting the subtitle file for DivX 109  
Language code chart for DVDs 110  
Playing music files on ROM  
Starting procedure 93  
Reading the screen 93  
Playing music files (from USB or SD)  
Starting procedure 111  
Using the touch panel keys 95  
Using the “Function” menu 96  
Reading the screen 111  
Using the touch panel keys (Music) 113  
Using the “Function” menu 114  
Playing a DVD-Video  
Starting procedure 97  
Reading the screen 97  
Using the touch panel keys 98  
– Resuming playback (Bookmark) 99  
Playing video files (from USB or SD)  
Starting procedure 115  
Reading the screen 115  
Using the touch panel keys (Video) 116  
5
En  
Contents  
– Searching for a specific scene and  
starting playback from a specified  
time 117  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
Starting procedure 139  
Reading the screen 139  
Using the “Function” menu 117  
Using the touch panel keys 140  
– Selecting a SIRIUS channel  
directly 141  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
Starting procedure 118  
Reading the screen 118  
– Display the Radio ID 141  
– Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations 141  
– Using “My Mix” function 142  
– Using the “Instant Replay”  
function 142  
Using the touch panel keys 120  
Starting the video playback 122  
Narrowing down a song or video with the  
list 122  
Operating the functions from your iPod 123  
Playing MusicSphere 124  
– Reading the screen 124  
– Using the touch panel keys 124  
Using the “Function” menu 124  
Using the “Function” menu 143  
– Setting the memorized songs 143  
– Using the Game Alert function 144  
– Displaying Game Information 144  
Using AV input  
Reading the screen 145  
Using AV1 145  
Using AV2 145  
Using the touch panel keys 145  
Using Pandora®  
Starting procedure 126  
Reading the screen 127  
Using the touch panel keys 128  
Using the Bluetooth audio player  
Starting procedure 129  
Reading the screen 129  
Using the touch panel keys 131  
Using the “Function” menu 131  
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)  
Starting procedure 146  
Reading the screen 146  
Using the touch panel keys 147  
Customizing preferences  
Using the XM tuner  
Starting procedure 133  
Reading the screen 133  
Displaying the “Navi Settings” screen 148  
Checking the connections of leads 148  
Checking sensor learning status and driving  
status 149  
Using the touch panel keys 135  
– Selecting an XM channel directly 136  
– Displaying the Radio ID 136  
– Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations 136  
– Selecting a channel from the list 137  
– Using “My Mix” function 137  
Using the “Function” menu 138  
– Setting the memorized songs 138  
– Clearing status 149  
Using the “Gas Mileage” function 150  
– Inputting the fuel consumption  
information for calculating the fuel  
cost 150  
– Calculating the fuel consumption 151  
– Exporting the data of fuel cost  
information 151  
Recording your travel history 152  
6
En  
Contents  
Using the demonstration guidance 152  
Registering your home 152  
– Adjusting the response positions of the  
touch panel (touch panel  
Correcting the current location 153  
Changing the eco-function setting 153  
Displaying the “Map Settings” screen 154  
Setting the auto-zoom display 154  
Setting the detailed city map 155  
Setting the barrier graphic for city map 155  
Displaying the traffic notification icon 155  
Displaying the Bluetooth connection  
icon 156  
Setting the current street name display 156  
Setting the “Favorites” icon display 156  
Displaying the 3D landmarks 156  
Displaying maneuvers 157  
calibration) 165  
– Setting the illumination color 165  
– Checking the version information 166  
Selecting the video for “Rear display” 166  
Adjusting the picture 167  
Displaying the “AV System Settings”  
screen 168  
– Setting video input 1 (AV1) 168  
– Setting video input 2 (AV2) 168  
– Changing the wide screen mode 169  
– Setting the rear output 169  
– Switching the muting/attenuation  
timing 170  
Displaying the MSN Direct icons 157  
Displaying the fuel consumption  
information 157  
Displaying POI on the map 157  
– Displaying preinstalled POIs on the  
map 157  
– Switching the muting/attenuation  
level 170  
– Acquiring/Cataloging iPod music  
information 170  
– Displaying your DivX VOD registration  
code 171  
– Displaying the customized POIs 158  
Changing “View Mode” 159  
Displaying the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen 171  
Setting the map color change between day  
and night 159  
Changing the road color 159  
Changing the setting of navigation  
interruption screen 160  
Selecting the “Quick Access” menu 160  
Displaying the “System Settings”  
screen 161  
– Using balance adjustment 172  
– Using the equalizer 172  
– Adjusting loudness 174  
– Using subwoofer output 174  
– Using the high pass filter 175  
– Adjusting source levels 175  
– Enhancing bass (Bass Booster) 175  
– Setting the simulated sound  
stage 175  
– Customizing the regional settings 161  
– Setting the Volume for Guidance and  
Phone 163  
Replicating the settings 176  
Turning off the screen 177  
– Changing the preinstalled splash  
screen 163  
– Changing to the splash screen stored  
in the SD memory card 164  
Operating Your Navigation System with  
Voice  
To Ensure Safe Driving 178  
Basics of Voice Operation 178  
– Flow of voice operation 178  
– Starting voice operation 178  
– How to use the voice operation 179  
– Setting for rear view camera 164  
7
En  
Contents  
Available Basic Voice Commands 181  
– Basic commands 181  
Playable discs 204  
– DVD-Video and CD 204  
– AVCHD recorded discs 204  
– Playing DualDisc 205  
– Dolby Digital 205  
– Voice operation for the iPod 181  
– Voice operation for AV source (other  
than iPod) 182  
– Voice commands related to hands-free  
phoning 183  
Tips for Voice Operation 184  
– DTS sound 205  
Detailed information for playable media 205  
– Compatibility 205  
– Media compatibility chart 208  
Bluetooth 212  
About the SAT RADIO READY Logo 212  
HD Radio Technology 212  
SD and SDHC logo 213  
WMA/WMV 213  
Other functions  
Setting the anti-theft function 185  
– Setting the password 185  
– Entering the password 185  
– Deleting the password 185  
– Forgotten password 185  
Returning the navigation system to the  
default or factory settings 186  
– Setting items to be deleted 187  
– Restore Factory Settings 188  
– Displaying the “Select Items to Reset”  
screen 188  
DivX 213  
AAC 214  
Detailed information regarding connectable  
iPods 214  
– iPod 214  
– iPhone 214  
– iTunes 214  
Using the LCD screen correctly 214  
– Handling the LCD screen 214  
– Liquid crystal display (LCD)  
screen 215  
Appendix  
Troubleshooting 190  
Messages and how to react to them 195  
Messages for audio functions 197  
Positioning technology 199  
– Positioning by GPS 199  
– Positioning by dead reckoning 199  
– How do GPS and dead reckoning work  
together? 199  
Handling large errors 200  
– When positioning by GPS is  
impossible 200  
– Maintaining the LCD screen 215  
– LED (light-emitting diode)  
backlight 215  
Display information 216  
– Destination Menu 216  
– Phone Menu 216  
– Settings Menu 217  
Glossary 221  
Specifications 224  
– Conditions likely to cause noticeable  
positioning errors 201  
Route setting information 203  
– Route search specifications 203  
Handling and care of discs 203  
– Built-in drive and care 204  
– Ambient conditions for playing a  
disc 204  
8
En  
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
e.g.)  
Manual overview  
[Destination], [Settings].  
Extra information, alternatives and other  
notes are presented in the following for-  
mat:  
!
!
!
Before using this product, be sure to read Im-  
portant Information for the User (a separate  
manual) which contains warnings, cautions,  
and other important information that you  
should note.  
e.g.)  
p If the home location has not been stored  
yet, set the location first.  
Descriptions of separate operations to be  
performed on the same screen are indi-  
cated with # at the beginning of the de-  
scription:  
e.g.)  
# Touch [OK].  
References are indicated like this:  
e.g.)  
How to use this manual  
Finding the operation procedure for  
what you want to do  
When you have decided what you want to do,  
you can find the page you need from the Con-  
tents.  
= For details, refer to How to use the navi-  
gation menu screens on page 22.  
Finding the operation procedure from  
a menu name  
If you want to check the meaning of an item  
displayed on the screen, you will find the ne-  
cessary page from the Display information at  
the end of the manual.  
Terms used in this manual  
“Front Display” and “Rear Display”  
In this manual, the screen that is attached to  
the body of this navigation unit will be referred  
to as the “Front Display”. Any additional op-  
tional screen that is purchased for use in con-  
junction with this navigation unit will be  
referred to as the “Rear Display”.  
Glossary  
Use the glossary to find the meanings of  
terms.  
Conventions used in this manual  
Before moving on, take a few minutes to read  
the following information about the conven-  
tions used in this manual. Familiarity with  
these conventions will help you greatly as you  
learn how to use your new equipment.  
“Video image”  
“Video image” in this manual indicates mov-  
ing images of DVD-Video, DivX®, iPod, and any  
equipment that is connected to this system  
with an RCA cable, such as general-purpose  
AV equipment.  
!
Buttons on your navigation system are de-  
scribed in ALL CAPITAL, BOLD lettering:  
e.g.)  
MENU button, MAP button.  
“External storage device (USB, SD)”  
!
Items in different menus, screen titles, and  
functional components are described in  
bold with double quotation marks “ ”:  
e.g.)  
“Destination Menu” screen or “AV  
Source” screen  
The SD memory card, SDHC memory card, mi-  
croSD card, microSDHC card and USB mem-  
ory device are collectively referred to as the  
“external storage device (USB, SD)”. If it indi-  
cates the USB memory only, it is referred to as  
the “USB storage device”.  
!
Touch panel keys that are available on the  
screen are described in bold in brackets [ ]:  
9
En  
 
Chapter  
01  
Introduction  
required. For details, please visit  
http://www.mp3licensing.com.  
“SD memory card”  
The SD memory card, SDHC memory card, mi-  
croSD card and microSDHC card are collec-  
tively referred to as the “SD memory card”.  
iPod compatibility  
This product supports only the following iPod  
models and iPod software versions. Others  
may not work correctly.  
Notice regarding video  
viewing  
Remember that use of this system for com-  
mercial or public viewing purposes may con-  
stitute an infringement on the author’s rights  
as protected by the Copyright Law.  
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
iPod nano first generation: Ver. 1.3.1  
iPod nano second generation: Ver. 1.1.3  
iPod nano third generation: Ver. 1.1.3  
iPod nano fourth generation: Ver. 1.0.3  
iPod nano fifth generation: Ver. 1.0.1  
iPod fifth generation: Ver. 1.3  
iPod classic: Ver. 2.0.2  
iPod touch first generation: Ver. 3.1.1  
iPod touch second generation: Ver. 3.1.1  
iPhone: Ver. 3.1.2  
Notice regarding DVD-  
Video viewing  
This product incorporates copyright protection  
technology that is protected by method claims  
of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual  
property rights owned by Macrovision  
Corporation and other rights owners. Use of  
this copyright protection technology must be  
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is  
intended for home and other limited viewing  
uses only unless otherwise authorized by  
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering  
or disassembly is prohibited.  
iPhone 3G: Ver. 3.1.2  
iPhone 3GS: Ver. 3.1.2  
p In this manual, iPod and iPhone will be re-  
ferred to as iPod.  
p When you use this navigation system with  
a Pioneer USB interface cable for iPod (CD-  
IU50V) (sold separately), you can control an  
iPod compatible with this navigation sys-  
tem.  
p To obtain maximum performance, we re-  
commend that you use the latest software  
for the iPod.  
p Operation methods may vary depending on  
the iPod models and the software version  
of iPod.  
p For details about iPod compatibility with  
this navigation system, refer to the informa-  
tion on our website.  
p iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-  
tered in the U.S. and other countries.  
p iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.  
Notice regarding MP3 file  
usage  
Supply of this navigation system conveys only  
a license for private, non-commercial use and  
does not convey a license nor imply any right  
to use this product in any commercial (i.e. rev-  
enue-generating), real time broadcasting (ter-  
restrial, satellite, cable and/or any other  
media), broadcasting/streaming via internet,  
intranets and/or other networks or in other  
electronic content distribution systems, such  
as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applica-  
tions. An independent license for such use is  
Map coverage  
For details about the map coverage of this na-  
vigation system, refer to the information on  
our website.  
10  
En  
 
Chapter  
Introduction  
01  
ing the navigation system to the default  
or factory settings on page 186.  
Protecting the LCD panel  
and screen  
p Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the  
LCD screen when this product is not being  
used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight  
can result in LCD screen malfunction due  
to the resulting high temperatures.  
p When using a cellular phone, keep the an-  
tenna of the cellular phone away from the  
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the  
video in the form of spots, colored stripes,  
etc.  
p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be  
sure to touch the touch panel keys with  
your finger only and gently touch the  
screen.  
Notes on internal memory  
Before removing the vehicle  
battery  
If the battery is disconnected or discharged,  
the memory will be erased and must be repro-  
grammed.  
p Some data remains. Be sure to read Return-  
ing the navigation system to the default or  
factory settings first.  
= For detailed information about the items  
which would be erased, refer to Return-  
ing the navigation system to the default  
or factory settings on page 186.  
Data subject to erasure  
The information is erased by disconnecting  
the yellow lead from the battery (or removing  
the battery itself). However, some items re-  
main.  
p Some data remains. Be sure to read Return-  
ing the navigation system to the default or  
factory settings first.  
= For detailed information about the items  
which would be erased, refer to Return-  
11  
En  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
Checking part names and functions  
This chapter gives information about the names of the parts and the main features using the buttons.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
AVIC-Z120BT (with the LCD panel  
closed)  
8
9
AVIC-Z120BT (with the LCD panel open)  
12  
En  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
6
8
9
2
3
4
7
5
1
AVIC-X920BT  
button  
Press the  
tions.  
Press and hold the  
AV source to mute.  
1
!
!
Press to display the map screen while  
the navigation function screen is dis-  
played.  
Press and hold to display the “Picture  
Adjustment” screen.  
button to activate voice opera-  
button to switch the  
To cancel the muting, press and hold it  
again.  
= For details, refer to Adjusting the pic-  
ture on page 167.  
2 VOL (+/–) button  
5 TRK button  
Press to adjust the AV (Audio and Video)  
source volume.  
Press to perform manual seek tuning, fast  
forward, reverse and track search controls.  
= For details, refer to the descriptions from  
Chapter 14 to Chapter 30.  
3 HOME button  
!
Press the HOME button to display the  
“Top Menu” screen.  
6 h button  
!
Press to switch between the “Classic  
Menu” and the “Shortcut Menu” while  
the “Top Menu” is displayed.  
= For details, refer to What you can do  
on each menu on page 23.  
7 LCD screen  
8 Disc loading slot  
Insert a disc to play.  
= For details of the operation, refer to In-  
serting and ejecting a disc on the next  
page.  
!
Press and hold to turn off the screen dis-  
play.  
4 MODE button  
Press to switch between the map screen  
and the AV operation screen.  
9 SD card slot  
!
= For more detailed information, refer to In-  
serting and ejecting an SD memory card  
on page 15.  
13  
En  
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
!
Do not use with the LCD panel left open. If  
LCD panel is left open, it may result in injury  
in the event of an accident.  
Adjusting the LCD panel angle  
p This function is available for AVIC-Z120BT  
only.  
CAUTION  
Do not open or close the LCD panel by force.  
This may cause malfunction.  
WARNING  
!
!
When opening, closing and adjusting the angle  
of the LCD panel, be careful not to get your fin-  
gers caught.  
Do not operate this navigation system until  
the LCD panel completely opens or closes. If  
this navigation system is operated while the  
LCD panel is opening or closing, the LCD  
panel may stop at that angle for safety.  
Do not place a glass or a can on the open  
LCD panel. Doing so may break this naviga-  
tion system.  
CAUTION  
Do not open or close the LCD panel by force. This  
may cause malfunction.  
!
1
Press the h button.  
The “Monitor Setup” screen appears.  
!
Do not insert anything other than a disc into  
the disc loading slot.  
2 Touch or to adjust the angle.  
1
Press the h button.  
The “Monitor Setup” screen appears.  
2
Touch [Open].  
3
Touch  
.
p The adjusted angle of the LCD panel will be  
memorized and the LCD panel will automa-  
tically return to that angle the next time the  
LCD panel is opened or closed.  
The LCD panel opens, and the disc loading  
slot appears.  
3
Insert a disc into the disc loading slot.  
Inserting and ejecting a disc  
Inserting a disc (for AVIC-Z120BT)  
p This section describes operations for AVIC-  
Z120BT.  
WARNING  
!
When opening, closing and adjusting the  
angle of the LCD panel, be careful not to get  
your fingers caught.  
The disc is loaded, and the LCD panel closes.  
14  
En  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
1
Press the h button.  
Ejecting a disc (for AVIC-Z120BT)  
p This section describes operations for AVIC-  
The touch panel keys for ejecting the media  
appear.  
Z120BT.  
2
Touch [Disc Eject].  
1
Press the h button.  
The “Monitor Setup” screen appears.  
2
Touch [Disc Eject].  
The disc is ejected.  
The LCD panel opens, and the disc is ejected.  
Remove the disc, and press the h but-  
Inserting and ejecting an  
SD memory card  
3
ton.  
WARNING  
The LCD panel closes.  
Ejecting an SD memory card during data transfer  
can damage the SD memory card. Be sure to  
eject the SD memory card by following the proce-  
dure described in this manual.  
Inserting a disc (for AVIC-X920BT)  
p This section describes operations for AVIC-  
X920BT.  
CAUTION  
%
Insert a disc into the disc loading slot.  
If data loss or corruption occurs on the storage  
device for any reason, it is usually not possible to  
recover the data. Pioneer accepts no liability for  
damages, costs or expenses arising from data  
loss or corruption.  
p This system is not compatible with Multi  
Media Card (MMC).  
p Compatibility with all SD memory cards is  
not guaranteed.  
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-  
mance with some SD memory cards.  
p Do not insert anything other than a disc  
into the disc loading slot.  
Inserting an SD memory card  
(for AVIC-Z120BT)  
p This section describes operations for AVIC-  
Ejecting a disc (for AVIC-X920BT)  
p This section describes operations for AVIC-  
X920BT.  
Z120BT.  
15  
En  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
Ejecting an SD memory card  
(for AVIC-Z120BT)  
p This section describes operations for AVIC-  
CAUTION  
!
!
Do not press the h button when an SD mem-  
ory card is not fully inserted. Doing so may da-  
mage the card.  
Z120BT.  
Do not press the h button before an SD mem-  
ory card has been completely removed. Doing  
so may damage the card.  
1
Press the h button.  
The “Monitor Setup” screen appears.  
2
Touch [Eject SD].  
1
Press the h button.  
The “Monitor Setup” screen appears.  
2
Touch [SD Insert].  
The LCD panel opens.  
p Touch [Yes] if the message indicating that  
the flap opens after the navigation system  
restarts appears.  
The LCD panel opens, and the SD card slot ap-  
pears.  
3
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
Insert it with the label surface facing to the up-  
side and press the card until it clicks and com-  
pletely locks.  
The navigation system restarts, and then the  
LCD panel opens.  
3
Press the middle of the SD memory  
card gently until it clicks.  
4
Press the h button.  
The LCD panel closes.  
p If data related to map data, such as custo-  
mized POI data, is stored on the SD mem-  
ory card, the navigation system restarts.  
16  
En  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
4
Pull the SD memory card out straight.  
Ejecting an SD memory card  
(for AVIC-X920BT)  
p This section describes operations for AVIC-  
X920BT.  
1
Press the h button.  
The touch panel keys for ejecting the media  
appear.  
5
Press the h button.  
2
Touch [Eject SD].  
The LCD panel closes.  
p If data related to map data, such as custo-  
mized POI data, is stored on the SD mem-  
ory card, the navigation system restarts.  
p When you eject the SD memory card by  
touching [Eject SD], the model information  
that you are using will be automatically  
stored into the SD memory card.  
The utility program AVIC FEEDS will use  
this information to recognize the model  
that you use.  
A message prompting you to remove the SD  
memory card appears.  
Inserting an SD memory card  
(for AVIC-X920BT)  
p This section describes operations for AVIC-  
X920BT.  
%
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
3
Press the middle of the SD memory  
Insert the SD memory card with the terminal  
contacts facing down, and press the card until  
it clicks and locks completely.  
card gently until it clicks.  
4
Pull the SD memory card out straight.  
p If data related to map data, such as custo-  
mized POI data, is stored on the SD mem-  
ory card, the navigation system restarts.  
17  
En  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
!
If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-  
rage device for any reason, it is usually not  
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts  
no liability for damages, costs or expenses  
arising from data loss or corruption.  
When the data related to map data is  
stored  
If data related to map data, such as custo-  
mized POI data, is stored on the SD memory  
card, operating procedures are slightly differ-  
ent.  
Plugging in a USB storage device  
1
Press the h button and then touch  
[Eject SD].  
%
Plug a USB storage device into the USB  
connector.  
2
Touch [Yes].  
USB connector  
The navigation system restarts, and a message  
prompting you to remove the SD memory card  
appears.  
USB storage device  
p Compatibility with all USB storage devices  
is not guaranteed.  
This navigation system may not achieve op-  
timum performance with some USB sto-  
rage devices.  
p Connection via a USB hub is not possible.  
Unplugging a USB storage device  
3
Eject the SD memory card while the  
%
Pull out the USB storage device after  
checking that no data is being accessed.  
message is displayed.  
Eject the SD memory card before touching  
[OK].  
Connecting and  
disconnecting an iPod  
4
Touch [OK].  
The navigation system restarts.  
CAUTION  
!
To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-  
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-  
tion system while data is being transferred.  
Plugging and unplugging a  
USB storage device  
CAUTION  
!
To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-  
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-  
tion system while data is being transferred.  
18  
En  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
!
If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-  
rage device for any reason, it is usually not  
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts  
no liability for damages, costs or expenses  
arising from data loss or corruption.  
Flow from startup to  
termination  
1
Start the engine to boot up the system.  
After a short pause, the splash screen comes  
on for a few seconds.  
p To protect the LCD screen from damage, be  
sure to touch the touch panel keys with  
your finger only and gently touch the  
screen.  
Connecting your iPod  
Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-  
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-  
tion system.  
p A USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU50V)  
(sold separately) is required for connection.  
2
Turn off the vehicle engine to termi-  
nate the system.  
The navigation system is also turned off.  
1
Pull out the USB storage device after  
checking that no data is being accessed.  
On first-time startup  
When you use the navigation system for the  
first time, select the language that you want to  
use.  
1
Start the engine to boot up the system.  
After a short pause, the splash screen comes  
on for a few seconds.  
2
Touch the language that you want to  
use on the screen.  
USB and mini-jack  
connector  
USB interface cable  
for iPod  
p For details about iPod compatibility with  
this navigation system, refer to the informa-  
tion on our website.  
p Connection via a USB hub is not possible.  
3
Touch the language that you want to  
use for the voice guidance.  
2
Connect your iPod.  
Disconnecting your iPod  
%
Pull out the USB interface cable for iPod  
after checking that no data is being ac-  
cessed.  
The navigation system will now restart.  
19  
En  
 
Chapter  
02  
Basic operation  
4
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking  
its details, and then touch [OK] if you  
agree to the conditions.  
The map screen appears.  
Regular startup  
%
Start the engine to boot up the system.  
After a short pause, the splash screen comes  
on for a few seconds.  
p The screen shown will differ depending on  
the previous conditions.  
p When there is no route, the disclaimer ap-  
pears after the navigation system reboots.  
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its  
details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to  
the conditions.  
p If the anti-theft function is activated, you  
must enter your password.  
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its  
details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to  
the conditions.  
20  
En  
 
Chapter  
Basic operation  
02  
21  
En  
Chapter  
03  
How to use the navigation menu screens  
Screen switching overview  
2
1
4
3
1
5
6
22  
En  
 
Chapter  
How to use the navigation menu screens  
03  
What you can do on each  
menu  
Shortcut Menu  
Registering your favorite menu items in short-  
cuts allows you to quickly jump to the regis-  
tered menu screen by a simple touch on the  
Shortcut Menu screen.  
1 Top Menu  
Press the HOME button to display the “Top  
Menu” screen.  
This is the starting menu to access the desired  
screens and operate the various functions.  
There are two types of the “Top Menu” screen.  
Selecting the shortcut  
p Up to 15 menu items can be registered in  
shortcuts.  
1
Press the HOME button repeatedly to  
display the “Shortcut Menu” screen.  
p When you use the navigation system for the  
first time or no items are set on shortcut, a  
message will appear. Touch [Yes] to pro-  
ceed to next step.  
Classic Menu  
2
Touch [Shortcut].  
Shortcut Menu  
The Shortcut selection screen appears.  
Touch the tab on the right edge or scroll  
the bar to display the icon that you want  
to set to shortcut.  
p In this manual, Classic Menu will be re-  
ferred to as “Top Menu”.  
2 Destination Menu  
3
You can search for your destination on this  
menu. You can also check or cancel your set  
route from this menu.  
3 Phone Menu  
You can access the screen that is related to  
hands-free phoning to see call histories and  
change the settings on the Bluetooth wireless  
technology connection.  
4 AV operation screen  
This is the screen that normally appears when  
you play the AV source.  
Scroll bar  
5 Settings Menu  
4
Touch and hold the icon that you want  
You can access the screen to customize set-  
tings.  
6 Map screen  
to add to shortcut.  
5
Move the icon to the left side of the  
screen, and then release it.  
The selected item is added to shortcut.  
Press the MODE button to display the naviga-  
tion map screen.  
23  
En  
 
Chapter  
03  
How to use the navigation menu screens  
Operating the on-screen  
keyboard  
1
8
2
3
Canceling the shortcut  
1
Touch and hold the icon that you want  
4
to cancel the shortcut.  
5
6
7
2
Move the icon to the right side of the  
1 Screen title  
The screen title appears.  
2 Text box  
screen, and then release it.  
Operating list screens (e.g.  
POI list)  
Displays the characters that are entered. If  
there is no text in the box, an informative  
guide with text appears.  
1
4
5
3 Keyboard  
Touch the keys to enter the characters.  
4
Returns the previous screen.  
5 Keys  
Switches the on-screen keyboard layout.  
6 Sym., Others, 0-9  
2
3
You can enter other characters of alphabet.  
1 Screen title  
2
You can also enter text with marks such as [&]  
or [+] or numbers.  
Touching or on the scroll bar scrolls  
through the list and allows you to view the re-  
maining items.  
Touch to toggle the selection.  
p When you use any of “A”, “Ä”, “Å”, “Æ”,  
the displayed result is the same.  
3
7 OK  
Returns the previous screen.  
4 Listed items  
Confirms the entry and allows you to proceed  
to the next step.  
Touching an item on the list allows you to nar-  
row down the options and proceed to the next  
operation.  
8
Deletes the input text one letter at a time, be-  
ginning at the end of the text. Continuing to  
touch the button deletes all of the text.  
5
If all of the characters cannot be displayed  
within the displayed area, touching the key to  
the right of the item allows you to see remain-  
ing characters.  
24  
En  
 
Chapter  
How to use the map  
04  
Most of the information provided by your navigation system can be seen on the map. You need to be-  
come familiar with how information appears on the map.  
How to read the map screen  
This example shows an example of a 2D map screen.  
1
2
h
g
f
e
d
c
3
4
5
6
b
7
8
9
a
p Information with an asterisk (*) appears  
only when the route is set.  
Shows the turning direction after next and the  
distance to there.  
p Depending on the conditions and settings,  
some items may not be displayed.  
1 Name of the street to be used (or next gui-  
dance point)*  
= For details, refer to Displaying maneu-  
vers on page 157.  
5 Zoom in/Zoom out  
Touching  
displays touch panel keys for  
2 Next direction of travel*  
changing the map scale and the map orienta-  
tion.  
6 Current position  
When you approach a guidance point, this  
item appears.  
As you get closer to the guidance point, the  
color of the item changes to green.  
p Touching this item enables you to hear  
the next guidance again.  
Indicates the current location of your vehicle.  
The apex of the triangular mark indicates your  
orientation and the display moves automati-  
cally as you drive.  
p You can select between display and  
non-display.  
p The apex of the triangular mark is the  
proper current position.  
= For details, refer to Displaying man-  
7 Eco-Meter  
euvers on page 157.  
Displays a graph comparing the past average  
fuel mileage and the average fuel mileage  
since the navigation system was last started.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the fuel  
consumption information on page 157.  
8 Street name (or city name) that your vehi-  
cle is traveling along  
3 Distance to the guidance point*  
Shows the distance to the next guidance  
point.  
p Touching this item enables you to hear  
the next guidance again.  
4 Second Maneuver Arrow*  
25  
En  
 
Chapter  
04  
How to use the map  
= For details, refer to Setting the current  
street name display on page 156.  
9 Extension tab for the AV information bar  
Touching this tab opens the AV information  
bar and enables you to briefly view the current  
status on the AV source. Touching it again re-  
tracts the bar.  
for “Average Speed” and the actual  
driving speed. The estimated time of ar-  
rival is only a reference value, and does  
not guarantee arrival at that time.  
Travel time to your destination or  
waypoint*  
!
h Current time  
a Shortcut to the AV operation screen  
The AV source currently selected is shown.  
Touching the indicator displays the AV opera-  
tion screen of the current source directly.  
p If you connect your iPod to this naviga-  
tion system, the artwork for the album  
that is playing appears.  
Meaning of guidance flags  
Destination  
The checkered flag indicates your  
destination.  
Waypoint  
The blue flags indicate your way-  
points.  
Guidance point  
b Quick Access icon  
Displays the “Quick Access” menu.  
= For details, refer to Setting the “Quick  
Access” menu on page 28.  
The next guidance point (next turn-  
ing point, etc.) is shown by a yel-  
low flag.  
c Map orientation indicator  
!
When “North up” is selected,  
played.  
When “Heading up” is selected,  
displayed.  
is dis-  
is  
Enlarged map of the intersection  
When “Close Up View” in the “Map Settings”  
screen is “On”, an enlarged map of the inter-  
section appears.  
!
p The red arrow indicates north.  
d Current route*  
The route currently set is highlighted in color  
on the map. If a waypoint is set on the route,  
the route after the next waypoint is high-  
lighted in another color.  
e Direction line*  
The direction towards your destination (next  
waypoint, or cursor) is indicated with a  
straight line.  
= For details, refer to Setting the auto-zoom  
f Bluetooth connection icon  
This icon shows whether the device featuring  
Bluetooth technology is connected or not. You  
can select between display and non-display.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Blue-  
tooth connection icon on page 156.  
g Multi-Info window  
display on page 154.  
Each touch of [Multi-Info window] changes  
the display information.  
!
Distance to the destination (or dis-  
tance to waypoint)*  
!
Estimated time of arrival at your des-  
tination or waypoint*  
The estimated time of arrival is an ideal  
value calculated based on the value set  
26  
En  
 
Chapter  
How to use the map  
04  
dance for the destination or a waypoint is  
available). Please review and obey all local traf-  
fic rules along the highlighted route. (For your  
safety.)  
Display during freeway driving  
In certain locations of the freeway, lane infor-  
mation is available, indicating the recom-  
mended lane to be in to easily maneuver the  
next guidance.  
1
Operating the map screen  
Changing the scale of the map  
You can change the map scale between 25  
yard and 1 000 miles (25 meters and 2 000 kilo-  
meters).  
1
2
Display the map screen.  
Touch  
on the map screen.  
with the map scale appear.  
While driving on the freeway, freeway exit  
numbers and freeway signs may be displayed  
when in the vicinity of interchanges and exits.  
and  
2
3
3
Touch  
or  
to change the map  
scale.  
1 Lane information  
p If you do not operate the function for a few  
seconds, the initial map screen automati-  
cally returns.  
Touch the direct scale key to change the map  
to the selected scale directly.  
2 Freeway exit information  
Displays the freeway exit.  
3 Freeway signs  
#
These show the road number and give direc-  
tional information.  
p If the data for these items is not contained  
in the built-in memory, the information is  
not available even if there are the signs on  
the actual road.  
Switching the map orientation  
You can switch how the map shows your vehi-  
cle’s direction between “Heading up” and  
“North up”.  
!
Heading up:  
Roads without turn-by-turn  
instructions  
Routable roads (the route displayed and high-  
lighted in purple) have only basic data and  
can only be used to plot a navigable route.  
Pioneer Navigation will only display a navig-  
able route on the map (only the arrival gui-  
The map display always shows the vehicle’s  
direction as proceeding toward the top of  
the screen.  
!
North up:  
The map display always has north at the  
top of the screen.  
27  
En  
 
Chapter  
04  
How to use the map  
p The map orientation is fixed at “North up”  
when the map scale is 25 miles (50 kilo-  
meters) or more.  
p The map orientation is fixed at “Heading  
up” when the 3D map screen is displayed.  
screen, with street name and other informa-  
tion for this location being shown. (The infor-  
mation shown varies depending on the  
position.)  
p The scrolling increment depends on your  
dragging length.  
1
2
Display the map screen.  
#
Touch  
.
The map returns to the current position.  
p Pressing MODE button returns the map to  
the current position.  
Touch  
on the map screen.  
or  
appears.  
Setting the “Quick Access” menu  
“Quick Access” menu allows you to perform  
various tasks, such as route calculation for the  
location indicated by the cursor or registering  
a location in [Favorites], faster than using the  
navigation menu.  
You can customize “Quick Access” displayed  
on screen. The “Quick Access” described here  
are prepared as the default setting.  
= For details, refer to Selecting the “Quick Ac-  
cess” menu on page 160.  
3
Touch  
or  
to switch the vehicle’s  
direction.  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
p If you do not operate the function for a few  
seconds, the initial map screen automati-  
cally returns.  
p Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot  
be removed from the Quick Access menu.  
%
When the map is displayed, touch  
.
Scrolling the map to the  
position you want to see  
1
Display the map screen.  
2
Touch and drag the map in the desired  
direction to scroll.  
Quick Access menu  
: Route Options*  
1
Displayed when the map is not scrolled. This  
item can be selected only during route gui-  
dance.  
You can modify the conditions for route calcu-  
lation and recalculate the current route.  
= For details, refer to Modifying the route cal-  
culation conditions on page 42.  
2
1 Cursor  
2 Distance from the current position  
Positioning the cursor to the desired location  
results in a brief informational overview about  
the location being displayed at the bottom of  
: Destination*  
28  
En  
 
Chapter  
How to use the map  
04  
Displayed when the map is scrolled. Set the  
route to the place specified with the cursor.  
: Registration  
Register information on the location indicated  
by the cursor to “Favorites”.  
= For details, refer to Registering a location by  
scroll mode on page 46.  
: Vicinity Search  
Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of  
the cursor.  
= For details, refer to Searching for a nearby  
POI on page 37.  
!
3D View:  
Displays a map with an antenna view (3D  
map).  
: Overlay POI  
Displays icons for surrounding facilities (POI)  
on the map.  
= For details, refer to Displaying POI on the  
map on page 157.  
: Volume  
Displays the “Volume Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Setting the Volume for  
Guidance and Phone on page 163.  
: Contacts  
Displays the “Contacts List” screen.  
= For details, refer to Calling a number in the  
“Contacts List” on page 69.  
!
Street View:  
Information on the next four guidance  
points closest to the current location ap-  
pear in order from top to bottom on the left  
side of the screen. The following informa-  
tion is displayed.  
Close  
Hides the Quick Access menu.  
Switching the view mode  
Various types of screen displays can be se-  
lected for navigation guidance.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on page 154.  
— Name of the next route to be taken by  
the vehicle  
— Arrow indicating the direction of the ve-  
hicle  
— Distance to the guidance points  
p This mode is available when the route is  
set.  
2
Touch [View Mode].  
The “View Mode” screen appears.  
3
Touch the type that you want to set.  
!
Rear View:  
You can select the following types:  
Displays the rear view image on the left  
side of the screen and the map on the right  
side of the screen.  
!
2D View (default):  
Displays a normal map (2D map).  
29  
En  
 
Chapter  
04  
How to use the map  
p This mode is available when [Camera] is  
set to “On”.  
= For details, refer to Setting for rear  
view camera on page 164.  
!
Eco Graph:  
Displays a graph for eco-driving on the left  
side of the screen and the map on the right  
side of the screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying “Eco  
Graph” on the next page.  
30  
En  
Chapter  
Eco-driving function  
05  
The green gauge indicates the current  
score, and the gray gauge indicates the  
best score to date.  
The “Eco Score” is updated every 5 min-  
utes.  
This navigation system is equipped with an  
Eco-driving function that can be used to esti-  
mate whether you are driving in an environ-  
mentally friendly way.  
This chapter describes this function.  
p The fuel mileage calculated is based on a  
theoretical value determined from vehicle  
speed and position information from the  
navigation system. The fuel mileage dis-  
played is only a reference value, and does  
not guarantee the mileage displayed can  
be obtained.  
p This is not displayed when “Eco Score”  
is set to “Off” or when no route is set.  
2 Best Score  
Displays the best score to date.  
p This is not displayed when “Eco Score”  
is set to “Off” or when no route is set.  
3 Average fuel mileage comparison graph  
Displays a comparison of the average fuel  
mileage up to the point the navigation sys-  
tem was last stopped (past average fuel  
mileage) and the current average fuel mile-  
age. The display is updated every 3 sec-  
onds. The more the value moves in the  
direction of +, the better the fuel mileage.  
There are three different graph bars.  
Displaying “Eco Graph”  
This function estimates approximate fuel mile-  
age based on your driving, compares that with  
your average fuel mileage in the past, and dis-  
plays the results in a graph.  
The graph appears when the map display is  
set to “Eco Graph”.  
!
Total  
A comparison of the past average fuel  
mileage and the average fuel mileage  
from the location the navigation system  
was last started to the current driving lo-  
cation.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on page 154.  
!
!
: Ordinary Road  
2
Touch [View Mode].  
A comparison of the past average fuel  
mileage and the average fuel mileage  
for 90 seconds in the past, while the ve-  
hicle is driving on an ordinary road.  
: Freeway  
The “View Mode” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Eco Graph].  
The “Eco Graph” screen appears.  
A comparison of the past average fuel  
mileage and the average fuel mileage  
for 90 seconds in the past, while the ve-  
hicle is driving on a freeway.  
1
2
3
4 Animal icons  
4
The number of displayed animal icons in-  
creases or decreases according to the value  
of “Eco Score”.  
1 Eco Score  
p This is not displayed when “Eco Score”  
is set to “Off” or when no route is set.  
p If you try to use the “Eco Graph” function  
immediately after you start using the navi-  
The result of the comparison of your past  
average fuel mileage and current average  
fuel mileage appears as a value from 0.0  
Pts (points) to 10.0 Pts. The higher the  
value, the better the fuel mileage when  
compared to past route guidance.  
gation system for the first time,  
may be  
displayed and the function may not be avail-  
able.  
31  
En  
 
Chapter  
05  
Eco-driving function  
= For details, refer to Troubleshooting on  
page 190.  
p The display settings can be changed.  
= For details, refer to Changing the eco-  
function setting on page 153.  
Sudden start alert  
If the speed of the vehicle exceeds 25.5 mph  
(41 kmph) within 5 seconds from the time it is  
started, a message appears and a warning  
sound beeps.  
Displaying Eco Drive Level  
guidance  
This navigation system is equipped with the  
“Eco Drive Level” function that estimates how  
well you have driven in an environmentally  
friendly way.  
The points of “Eco Drive Level” change ac-  
cording to “Eco Score” when the vehicle  
reaches the destination. When a certain num-  
ber of points is reached, the level increases  
and a message appears.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Chan-  
ging the eco-function setting on page  
153.  
1
1 Tree icon  
As the level increases, a tree icon changes  
from a young tree to a big tree.  
p This is not displayed when “Eco Drive  
Level” is set to “Off”.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Changing the eco-function setting on  
page 153.  
32  
En  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
06  
The basic flow of creating  
your route  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, these route-setting functions  
are not available while your vehicle is in motion.  
To enable these functions, you must stop in a  
safe place and put on the parking brake before  
setting your route.  
1 Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply  
the parking brake.  
j
2 Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to  
Screen switching overview on page 22.  
p Some information regarding traffic regula-  
tions depends on the time when the route  
calculation is performed. Thus, the infor-  
mation may not correspond with a certain  
traffic regulation when your vehicle actually  
passes through the location in question.  
Also, the information on the traffic regula-  
tions provided will be for a passenger vehi-  
cle, and not for a truck or other delivery  
vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic  
regulations when driving.  
j
3 Select the method of searching for your  
destination.  
j
4 Enter the information about your destina-  
tion to calculate route.  
j
5 Confirm the location on the map.  
= For details, refer to Setting a route to  
your destination on page 41.  
j
6 The navigation system calculates the route  
to your destination, and then shows the  
route on the map.  
j
7 Check and decide the route.  
= For details, refer to Setting a route to  
your destination on page 41.  
j
8 Your navigation system sets the route to  
your destination, and the map of your sur-  
roundings appears.  
j
9 After releasing the parking brake, drive in  
accordance with navigation guidance.  
33  
En  
 
Chapter  
06  
Searching for and selecting a location  
states, provinces, or territories when your  
destination is outside of the state, province,  
or territory you selected.  
Searching for a location by  
address  
The most frequently used function is “Ad-  
dress”, in which the address is specified and  
the destination is searched.  
5
Touch [City].  
You can select the method of searching for a  
location by address.  
!
!
Searching for a city name first  
Finding the location by specifying the  
house number  
Searching for a city name first  
p Depending on the search results, some  
6
Enter the city name and then touch  
[OK].  
steps may be skipped.  
1
2
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Touch [Address].  
The “Select City” screen appears.  
7
Touch the desired city name.  
The “Street Name” screen appears.  
Touch  
#
.
The representative location of the city appears on  
the map screen.  
3
Touch the key next to “Country” to se-  
lect the country.  
8
Enter the street name and then touch  
If the destination is in another country, change  
the country setting.  
[OK].  
p Once the country has been selected, you  
only have to change countries when your  
destination is outside of the country you se-  
lected.  
4
Touch the key next to “State” and  
touch the desired state, province, or terri-  
tory on the list.  
If the location that you want to search for is in  
another state, province, or territory, this  
changes the area setting.  
The “Street Selection” screen appears.  
9
Touch the street you want.  
p Once the state, province, or territory has  
been selected, you only have to change  
34  
En  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
06  
10 Enter the house number and then  
touch [OK].  
4
Enter the street name and then touch  
[OK].  
The “House Number Selection” screen ap-  
The “Street Selection” screen appears.  
pears.  
5
Touch the street you want.  
11 Touch the desired house number range.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on page 41.  
The “Enter City Name” screen appears.  
6
Enter the city name and then touch  
[OK].  
Finding the location by  
specifying the house number  
p Depending on the search results, some  
steps may be skipped.  
1
2
Display the “Address Search” screen.  
The “Select City” screen appears.  
Touch [House #].  
7
Touch the desired city name.  
The “Enter House Number” screen appears.  
The “House Number Selection” screen ap-  
pears.  
If the house number you have entered is not  
found, a message appears. In that case, all  
house number ranges are listed after touching  
[Yes].  
3
Enter the house number and then  
touch [OK].  
#
Touch  
.
The representative location of the city appears on  
the map screen.  
8
Touch the desired house number range.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
The “Enter Street Name” screen appears.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on page 41.  
35  
En  
 
Chapter  
06  
Searching for and selecting a location  
Searching for a name by  
entering multiple keywords  
You can search for a name (such as a city  
name or a street name) by entering multiple  
keywords.  
p The maximum character number that can  
be input is 18, and you can enter keywords  
up to 3.  
p Separate keywords by a space, quotation  
mark, comma, hyphen, period, or slash.  
The result of search depends on the number  
of entered keywords.  
Setting up a route to your  
home  
If your home location is stored, the route to  
your home can be calculated by touching a  
single key.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
2
Touch [Return Home].  
p If you have not registered your home num-  
ber, a message appears. Touch [Register]  
to start registration.  
Entering a keyword  
All names containing the word beginning with  
the entered keyword are displayed as a search  
result.  
= For details, refer to Registering your  
home on page 152.  
Entering two keywords  
The names including the following words  
below are displayed as a result:  
Searching for Points of  
Interest (POI)  
Information about various facilities (Points Of  
Interest - POI), such as gas stations, parking  
lots or restaurants, is available. You can  
search for a POI by selecting the category (or  
entering the POI Name).  
!
!
First keyword you entered.  
The word beginning with the second key-  
word.  
Entering three keywords  
The names including the following words  
below are displayed as a result:  
!
!
The words that completely match with both  
first and second keywords you entered.  
The word beginning with the third keyword.  
Searching for POIs by preset  
categories  
You can search for POIs with a single touch  
from the preset category.  
e.g. Searching “East West Street”.  
Entered key-  
Search results  
words  
1
2
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
EAST W  
WEST S  
Touch [POI].  
“East West Street” is searchable.  
EAST WEST S  
WEST STREET  
E
W E S  
“East West Street” is not search-  
able.  
E WEST  
STREET  
36  
En  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
06  
p Once the state, province, or territory has  
3
Touch the desired category.  
been selected, you only have to change  
them when your destination is outside of  
the country you selected.  
Preset categories  
5
Enter the POI name and then touch  
[OK].  
The “POI List” screen appears.  
6
Touch the POI you want.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
The “POI List” screen appears.  
Touch the POI you want.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on page 41.  
#
Touch [Sort].  
Each time you touch [Sort] changes the sort  
order.  
p Current order is indicated on the upper  
right of the screen.  
4
!
:
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
:
Searching for a POI directly  
from the name of the facilities  
!
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
ting a route to your destination on page 41.  
Searching for a nearby POI  
You can search for POIs in your surroundings.  
2
Touch [POI].  
The “POI Search” screen appears.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
3
Touch [Spell Name].  
4
Touch the state code key and touch the  
desired state, province, or territory on the  
list.  
2
Touch [POI].  
The “POI Search” screen appears.  
State code key  
3
Touch [Near Me].  
POIs are divided into several categories.  
4
Touch the category you want.  
The “POI List” screen appears.  
p If there are more detailed categories within  
the selected category, repeat this step as  
many times as necessary.  
5
Touch the POI you want.  
If the destination is in another country, touch  
[Country] to change the country setting when  
the “State/Province Selection” screen is dis-  
played.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on page 41.  
37  
En  
 
Chapter  
06  
Searching for and selecting a location  
4
Touch the state code key and touch the  
Searching for POIs around the  
destination  
p This function is available when the route is  
desired state, province, or territory on the  
list.  
State code key  
set.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
2
Touch [POI].  
The “POI Search” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Near Destination].  
POIs are divided into several categories.  
If the destination is in another country, touch  
[Country] to change the country setting when  
the “State/Province Selection” screen is dis-  
played.  
p Once the state, province, or territory has  
been selected, you only have to change  
them when your destination is outside of  
the country you selected.  
4
Touch the category you want.  
The “POI List” screen appears.  
p If there are more detailed categories within  
the selected category, repeat this step as  
many times as necessary.  
5
Touch the POI you want.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Searching for a city name  
first on page 34.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on page 41.  
5
Enter the city name and then touch  
[OK].  
The “Select City” screen appears.  
Searching for POIs around the city  
You can search for POIs around a specified  
city.  
6
Touch the desired city name.  
The “POI List” screen appears.  
Touch  
#
.
The representative location of the city appears on  
the map screen.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
7
Touch the category you want.  
POIs are divided into several categories.  
2
Touch [POI].  
The “POI Search” screen appears.  
8
Touch the POI you want.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
3
Touch [Around City].  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on page  
41.  
38  
En  
 
Chapter  
Searching for and selecting a location  
06  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
Selecting destination from  
“Favorites”  
Storing locations you visit frequently saves  
time and effort.  
card slot.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 15.  
Selecting an item from the list provides an  
easy way to specify the position.  
p This function is not available if no locations  
have been registered in “Favorites”.  
= For details, refer to Storing a location in “Fa-  
vorites” on page 46.  
2
3
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Touch [AVIC FEEDS].  
The “Select POI” screen appears.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
4
Touch the item you want.  
5
Touch the POI you want.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on page  
41.  
2
3
Touch [Favorites].  
Touch the entry you want.  
Selecting a location you  
searched for recently  
The places that you have set as destination or  
waypoint in the past are automatically stored  
in “History”.  
p If no location is stored in Destination His-  
tory, you cannot select [History]. (If you  
perform a route calculation, you can select  
[History].)  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on page  
41.  
p “History” can store up to 100 locations. If  
the entries reach the maximum, the new  
entry overwrites the oldest one.  
Searching for POIs by using  
the data on the SD memory  
card  
Creating a customized POI is possible by  
using the utility program AVIC FEEDS which is  
available separately, on your PC. (AVIC FEEDS  
will be available on our website.) Storing the  
customized POI properly and inserting the SD  
memory card enables the system to use the  
data for searches.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
2
Touch [History].  
39  
En  
 
Chapter  
06  
Searching for and selecting a location  
3
Touch the entry you want.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on the next  
page.  
The searched location appears on the map  
screen.  
= For the subsequent operations, refer to Set-  
ting a route to your destination on the next  
page.  
Searching for a location by  
coordinates  
Entering a latitude and longitude pinpoints  
the location.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
2
3
Touch [Coordinates].  
Touch [East] or [West], and then enter  
the longitude.  
To enter W 50°1’2.5” for example, touch  
[West], [0], [5], [0], [0], [1], [0], [2], and [5].  
4
Touch [North] or [South], and then  
enter the latitude.  
To enter N 5°1’2.5” for example, touch [North],  
[0], [5], [0], [1], [0], [2], and [5].  
40  
En  
 
Chapter  
After the location is decided  
07  
1 Travel time to your destination  
2 Distance to the destination  
3 Estimated fuel cost to your destination  
= For details, refer to Inputting the fuel  
consumption information for calculating  
the fuel cost on page 150.  
Setting a route to your  
destination  
1
Searching for a location.  
= For details, refer to Chapter 6.  
After searching for the destination, the Loca-  
tion confirmation screen appears.  
4 Route calculation condition  
#
Touch  
.
2
Touch [OK].  
The message confirming whether to cancel the  
calculated route appears.  
Location confirmation screen  
Touch [Yes] to cancel the calculated route, and  
then the map screen appears.  
1
2
3
4
The destination is set, and then route calcula-  
tion starts.  
When the route calculation is completed,  
Route confirmation screen appears.  
p If you press the MODE button during route  
calculation, the calculation is canceled and  
the map screen appears.  
1 Multiple Route  
= For details, refer to Display multiple  
routes on this page.  
2 Options  
= For details, refer to Modifying the route  
calculation conditions on the next page.  
3 Profile  
= For details, refer to Checking the current  
itinerary on page 43.  
4 Waypoints  
#
Touch [Scroll].  
The map display changes to the scroll mode. You  
can fine-tune the location in the scroll mode, and  
then you can set the location as your destination  
or do various operations.  
#
Touch [Waypoint].  
= For details, refer to Editing waypoints on  
page 44.  
The location is added to the “Waypoints List”  
screen.  
p If a destination is not set, [Waypoint] is not  
available.  
Display multiple routes  
You can select a desired route from multiple  
route options. Calculated routes are shown in  
different colors.  
3
Touch [OK].  
Route confirmation screen  
p If you set waypoints, you cannot display  
multiple routes.  
1
Touch [Multiple Route] on the Route  
confirmation screen.  
Multiple route options appear.  
2
Touch  
to  
.
Another route is displayed.  
1
2
3
4
3
Touch [OK].  
Sets the displayed route as your route, and  
starts the route guidance.  
Route confirmation screen appears.  
41  
En  
 
Chapter  
08  
Checking and modifying the current route  
Displaying the “Route  
Overview” screen  
Modifying the route  
calculation conditions  
You can modify the conditions for route calcu-  
lation and recalculate the current route.  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
“Top Menu” screen.  
1
Display the “Route Overview” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Route  
Overview” screen on this page.  
2
Touch [Destination].  
The “Destination Menu” screen appears.  
3 Touch [Route Overview].  
2
3
Touch [Options].  
Touch the desired items to change the  
route calculation conditions and then  
touch [OK].  
1
2
3
The route is recalculated, and the Route con-  
firmation screen appears.  
Items that users can operate  
Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show that  
these are default or factory settings.  
1 Options  
= For details, refer to Modifying the route  
calculation conditions on this page.  
2 Profile  
= For details, refer to Checking the current  
itinerary on the next page.  
3 Waypoints  
= For details, refer to Editing waypoints on  
page 44.  
p [Route Overview] is active only when the  
route is set.  
Route Condition  
This setting controls how the route should be  
calculated by taking into account the time, dis-  
tance or main road.  
Determines which condition takes priority for  
route calculation.  
Fast*:  
Calculates a route with the shortest travel time  
to your destination as a priority.  
Short:  
Calculates a route with the shortest distance  
to your destination as a priority.  
Main Road:  
4
Touch [OK].  
Calculate a route that passes major arterial  
road as a priority.  
42  
En  
 
Chapter  
Checking and modifying the current route  
08  
Avoid Toll Road  
p The system may calculate a route that in-  
This setting controls whether toll roads (in-  
cluding toll areas) should be taken into ac-  
count.  
cludes streets or bridges that are subject to  
traffic restrictions during a certain time  
even if “On” is selected.  
Off*:  
Calculates a route that may include toll roads  
(including toll areas).  
CAUTION  
If the time difference is not set correctly, the navi-  
gation system cannot consider traffic regulations  
correctly. Set the time difference correctly (=  
Refer to Setting the time difference on page 162).  
On:  
Calculates a route that avoids toll roads (in-  
cluding toll areas).  
p The system may calculate a route that in-  
cludes toll roads even if “On” is selected.  
Learning Route  
The system learns the travel history of your ve-  
hicle for each road.  
This setting controls whether or not the travel  
history should be taken into account.  
On*:  
Avoid Ferry  
This setting controls whether ferry crossings  
should be taken into account.  
Off*:  
Calculates a route that may include ferries.  
On:  
Calculates a route that avoids ferries.  
p The system may calculate a route that in-  
cludes ferries even if “On” is selected.  
Calculates a route with the travel history taken  
into account.  
Off:  
Calculates a route without the travel history  
taken into account.  
Clear:  
Avoid Freeway  
Clears the current travel history.  
This setting controls whether freeways may be  
included in the route calculation.  
Off*:  
Calculates a route that may include freeways.  
On:  
Calculates a route that avoids freeways.  
p The system may calculate a route that in-  
cludes freeways even if “On” is selected.  
Checking the current itinerary  
You can check the route details.  
1
Display the “Route Overview” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Route  
Overview” screen on the previous page.  
Time restrictions  
This setting controls whether streets or  
bridges that have traffic restrictions during a  
certain time should be taken into account.  
p If you want to set your route to avoid raised  
draw bridges, select “On”.  
2
Touch [Profile].  
The “Route Profile” screen appears.  
On*:  
Calculates a route while avoiding streets or  
bridges with traffic restrictions during a cer-  
tain time.  
Off:  
Calculates a route while ignoring traffic re-  
strictions.  
43  
En  
 
Chapter  
08  
Checking and modifying the current route  
5
Touch [OK].  
Editing waypoints  
You can edit waypoints (locations you want to  
visit on the way to your destination) and recal-  
culate the route so that it passes through  
these locations.  
Adding a waypoint  
Up to 5 waypoints can be set, and waypoints  
and final destination can be sorted automati-  
cally or manually.  
6
Touch [OK] on the “Waypoints List”  
screen.  
1
Display the “Route Overview” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Route  
Overview” screen on page 42.  
2
Touch [Waypoints].  
The “Waypoints List” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Add].  
The route is recalculated, and the Route con-  
firmation screen appears.  
p If you set waypoints, you cannot display  
multiple routes.  
Deleting a waypoint  
You can delete waypoints from the route and  
then recalculate the route. (You can delete  
successive waypoints.)  
The “Select Search method” screen appears.  
4
Search for a location.  
1
Display the “Route Overview” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Route  
Overview” screen on page 42.  
2
Touch [Waypoints].  
The “Waypoints List” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Delete] next to the waypoint  
that you want to delete.  
The touched waypoint will be deleted from the  
list.  
= For details, refer to Chapter 6.  
4
Touch [OK] on the “Waypoints List”  
screen.  
The route is recalculated, and the Route con-  
firmation screen appears.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The map of the current position appears.  
44  
En  
 
Chapter  
Checking and modifying the current route  
08  
Sorting waypoints  
You can sort waypoints and recalculate the  
route.  
p You cannot sort waypoints that you have al-  
ready passed.  
Canceling the route guidance  
If you no longer need to travel to your destina-  
tion, follow the steps below to cancel the route  
guidance.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
1
Display the “Route Overview” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Route  
Overview” screen on page 42.  
2
Touch [Cancel Route].  
2
Touch [Waypoints].  
A message confirming the cancellation of the  
current route appears.  
The “Waypoints List” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Sort].  
3
Touch [Yes].  
The “Sort Waypoints” screen appears.  
4
Touch the waypoint or destination.  
The current route is deleted, and a map of  
your surroundings reappears.  
#
Touch [Skip].  
Put them in the desired order.  
Touch [Automatic].  
The next waypoint along the route is skipped.  
A new route to your destination through all re-  
maining waypoints, except for the skipped way-  
point, is calculated.  
When the route calculation is completed, Route  
confirmation screen appears.  
#
You can sort the destination and waypoints auto-  
matically. The system will show the nearest way-  
point (distance in a straight line) from the current  
location as waypoint 1, and sort the other points  
(including your destination) in order of distance  
from the waypoint 1.  
p [Skip] is available only when a waypoint is  
set.  
Touch [No].  
#
Touch [Clear].  
#
Waypoint sort is canceled.  
The previous screen returns without deleting the  
route.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The “Waypoints List” screen appears.  
6
Touch [OK] on the “Waypoints List”  
screen.  
The route is recalculated, and the Route con-  
firmation screen appears.  
7
Touch [OK].  
The map of the current position appears.  
45  
En  
 
Chapter  
09  
Registering and editing locations  
Registering a location by scroll  
mode  
Storing a location in  
“Favorites”  
Storing your favorite locations as “Favorites”  
provides you with the opportunity to save the  
time and effort of re-entering this information.  
Stored items can be made available on “Fa-  
vorites” later.  
1
Touch and drag the screen to scroll the  
map to the position that you want to regis-  
ter.  
Registering a location by  
“Favorites”  
Favorites can store up to 400 registered loca-  
tions. These can include your home location,  
favorite places, and destinations you have al-  
ready registered.  
p “Favorites” can store up to 400 locations.  
p Home location is counted as one of the  
items in “Favorites”.  
2
Touch  
to display the Quick Access  
menu.  
3
Touch  
.
The location is registered, and then the “Edit  
Favorite” screen appears.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
= For details, refer to Editing the entry in the  
“Favorites” list on this page.  
4
Touch [OK].  
2
Touch [Favorites].  
The registration is completed.  
The “Favorites” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Add].  
Editing registered locations  
The “Select Search method” screen appears.  
4
Search for a location.  
= For details about the search methods, refer  
to Chapter 6.  
Editing the entry in the  
“Favorites” list  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
5
When the map of the location you  
want to register is displayed, touch [OK].  
The location is registered, and then the “Edit  
Favorite” screen appears.  
2
Touch [Favorites].  
The “Favorites” screen appears.  
= For details, refer to Editing the entry in the  
“Favorites” list on this page.  
3
Touch next to the location that you  
want to edit.  
The “Edit Favorite” screen appears.  
6
Touch [OK].  
The registration is completed.  
46  
En  
 
Chapter  
Registering and editing locations  
09  
4
Touch the item that you want to  
3
Touch  
next to the home location.  
change the setting.  
The “Edit Favorite” screen appears.  
Touch the item that you want to  
p Up to 17 characters can be input for the  
4
name.  
change the setting.  
#
Touch [Name].  
You can enter the desired name.  
Touch [Phone#].  
#
You can edit the registered phone number. To dial  
the number, touch [Call].  
The maximum digits you can enter for the phone  
number is 15.  
#
Touch [Icon].  
You can change the symbol displayed on the map  
and “Favorites”.  
#
Touch [Phone#].  
To dial the number, touch [Call].  
Touch [Modify Location].  
#
Touch [Modify Location].  
You can change the registered location by scrol-  
ling the map.  
#
You can change the registered location by scrol-  
ling the map.  
5
Touch [OK].  
p For home information, [Name] and [Icon]  
are not editable.  
The registration is completed.  
5
Touch [OK].  
Editing your home  
When you have already registered your home,  
The registration is completed.  
you can edit the information of your home.  
Sorting the entry in the  
“Favorites” list  
1
2
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Touch [Favorites].  
p Home location is displayed on the top of  
the list.  
2
Touch [Favorites].  
The “Favorites” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Sort].  
Each time you touch [Sort] changes the sort  
order.  
p Current order is indicated on the upper  
right of the screen.  
!
:
47  
En  
 
Chapter  
09  
Registering and editing locations  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
6
Touch [Yes].  
!
!
:
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
:
Sorts the items in the list in order of the re-  
cently used items.  
Deleting the entry from the  
“Favorites” list  
The data you selected is deleted.  
Touch [No].  
Cancels the deletion.  
#
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Exporting and importing  
“Favorites” items  
Exporting “Favorites” items  
Exporting the “Favorites” data to an SD mem-  
ory card for editing is possible by using the uti-  
lity program AVIC FEEDS which is available  
separately, on your PC.  
2
Touch [Favorites].  
The “Favorites” screen appears.  
3
4
Touch [Delete].  
Select the location you want to delete.  
p If there is previous data in the SD memory  
card, the data is overwritten with new data  
when current data is exported.  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 15.  
A check mark appears next to the selected lo-  
cation.  
#
Touch [All] or [None].  
Selects or deselects all entries.  
2
3
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
5
Touch [Delete].  
Touch [Favorites].  
The “Favorites” screen appears.  
4
Touch  
.
Data export starts.  
After the data is exported, the completion mes-  
sage appears.  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
48  
En  
 
Chapter  
Registering and editing locations  
Deleting the entry from the  
09  
“History” list  
Items in “History” can be deleted. All entries  
in “History” can be deleted at once.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
5
Touch [OK].  
2
Touch [History].  
The “Favorites” screen appears.  
The “Destination History List” screen ap-  
pears.  
Importing the “Favorites” items  
3
Touch [Delete].  
You can import the locations that you have edi-  
ted on the utility program AVIC FEEDS which  
is available separately to “Favorites”.  
p When a location that is already registered  
in “Favorites” is imported, the location is  
overwritten.  
The “Delete from History” screen appears.  
4
Select the location you want to delete.  
1
Store the item into the SD memory card  
by using the AVIC FEEDS.  
2
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 15.  
A check mark appears next to the selected lo-  
cation.  
#
Touch [All] or [None].  
Selects or deselects all entries.  
3
4
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
5
Touch [Delete].  
Touch [Favorites].  
The “Favorites” screen appears.  
5
Touch  
.
The message confirming whether to replace  
the stored items appears.  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
6
Touch [Yes].  
The data you selected is deleted.  
Touch [No].  
Cancels the deletion.  
#
6
Touch [Yes].  
Data import starts.  
After importing the data is finished, the “Fa-  
vorites” screen appears.  
49  
En  
 
Chapter  
10  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
If you have an active subscription to  
General flow chart:  
MSN Direct service, you can check and  
browse various information on your navigation  
system, such as gas prices, movie times,  
weather conditions and traffic information.  
The information will be updated periodically.  
1 Check your product key.  
You have to know your product key for the  
subscription.  
(Refer to Checking your product key on this  
page.)  
IMPORTANT:  
j
To receive MSN® Direct on an MSN Direct-  
ready device, you must be within an MSN Di-  
rect coverage area; see http://www.msndirect.  
com/pioneer for current coverage maps. Cover-  
age areas are affected by reception limitations  
of the FM network as well as other factors,  
which may affect the ability to receive FM  
broadcasts. Coverage areas are subject to  
change. Not all content is available in all cover-  
age areas.  
2 Make an online subscription to MSN Direct  
service using your PC.  
(Refer to Subscribing to the MSN Direct ser-  
vice on the next page.)  
j
3 Activate the MSN Direct service on this pro-  
duct.  
(Refer to Activating the MSN Direct function  
on the next page.)  
© 2008 Microsoft Corporation. All rights re-  
served. Microsoft, MSN, and the MSN logo are  
trademarks of the Microsoft group of compa-  
nies.  
j
4 Activation is complete.  
Checking your product key  
The product key that you can find here is used  
in the online subscription.  
Notice about MSN Direct  
Pioneer is not responsible for the accuracy of  
the MSN Direct content. The MSN Direct con-  
tent may not be current or available at times,  
and is subject to change without notice.  
1
Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,  
and then touch [MSN Direct].  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
2
Touch [Status].  
Activating the service  
You have to activate MSN Direct first.  
p A web-connected computer is required for  
the online subscription.  
3
Write your product key down in the fol-  
lowing box:  
p If you have difficulty in online subscription,  
please call toll-free 1-866-658-7032.  
50  
En  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
10  
Subscribing to the MSN Direct  
service  
Browsing gas prices  
Recent gas prices of nearby gas stations are  
Within two days of completing the subscription,  
displayed in a list.  
execute Activating the MSN Direct function.  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates gas price information, the information  
provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-  
tual gas prices. Please refer to Notice about  
MSN Direct on the previous page.  
1
Access the following URL and read the  
description.  
http://www.msndirect.com/pioneer  
2
Be sure to check the coverage area and  
other availabilities of MSN Direct on the  
web page.  
It may take up to 24 hours for all the data to be-  
come available under the following conditions:  
!
!
When you use MSN Direct for the first time.  
When you have not performed this function  
previously around the current area.  
After the navigation system has been  
turned off for a few days.  
3
Go to the page for activation and enter  
your product key.  
!
4
Follow the directions on the web page  
to complete the subscription.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
Activating the MSN Direct function  
switching overview on page 22.  
After the online subscription, complete the ac-  
tivation so that the navigation system can re-  
ceive the information.  
This operation must be performed under the  
following conditions:  
2
Touch [MSN Direct].  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Gas Prices].  
— You are currently in the coverage area of  
MSN Direct.  
— The signal strength (  
) on the “MSN Di-  
rect Status” screen is not weak.  
1
2
Boot-up your navigation system.  
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
The “Gas Prices” screen appears.  
Touch the desired tab to change the  
3
Touch [MSN Direct].  
4
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
sort order.  
4
Touch [Status].  
5
Wait until the activation status changes  
to “Active”.  
It may take approximately 20 or 30 minutes to  
complete the activation.  
After activation is complete, the information  
will be available on each menu.  
Available options:  
51  
En  
 
Chapter  
10  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
!
Dist. (default):  
6
Touch [OK].  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
Name:  
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
Price:  
!
!
Sorts the items in the list by price.  
#
Touch [Refresh].  
The information is updated.  
p [Refresh] appears when new gas prices in-  
formation is received.  
Location confirmation screen appears.  
= For details, refer to Setting a route to your  
destination on page 41.  
5
Touch on the item that you want to  
view in detail.  
1
2
3
Browsing movie times  
Nearby theaters can be displayed on a list.  
Switching the screen allows you to see the  
movie title now showing.  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates movie information, the information pro-  
vided may not necessarily correspond to actual  
movie information. Please refer to Notice  
about MSN Direct on page 50.  
It may take up to six hours for all the data to  
become available under the following condi-  
tions:  
1 Name:  
Indicates the names of gas stations.  
p If there is no data, “Unknown” is dis-  
played.  
2 Price:  
Red: indicates gas stations whose gas  
prices exceed average prices of all gas sta-  
tions that are received.  
Green: indicates gas stations whose gas  
prices go below average prices of all gas  
stations that are received.  
!
!
When you use MSN Direct for the first time.  
When you have not performed this function  
previously around the current area.  
After the navigation system has been  
turned off for a few days.  
!
White: indicates gas stations with average  
prices of all gas stations that are received.  
The information in ( ) shows how current  
the information is.  
Searching for a theater by  
selecting a movie title  
p If there is no data, “–––––” is displayed.  
3 Dist.:  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Indicates the distance from the current lo-  
cation to the gas station.  
2
Touch [MSN Direct].  
p Touching  
allows you to check the loca-  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
tion on a map.  
3
Touch [Movie Times].  
The “All Movie Theaters” screen appears.  
52  
En  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
10  
= For details, refer to Setting a route to your  
4
Touch [All Movie Titles].  
destination on page 41.  
#
Touch [Call].  
Enables you to call the position if a telephone  
number is available. (Pairing with cellular phone  
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is re-  
quired.)  
Searching for a movie title by  
selecting a theater  
The movie titles now showing are displayed.  
Touch [Refresh].  
#
The information is updated.  
p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-  
tion is received.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
5
Touch the desired movie title.  
2
Touch [MSN Direct].  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
The theaters that are currently showing the se-  
lected movie are displayed.  
3
Touch [Movie Times].  
The “All Movie Theaters” screen appears.  
4
Touch the desired tab to change the  
sort order.  
Available options:  
!
Dist. (default):  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
Name:  
#
Touch [Refresh].  
!
The information is updated.  
p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-  
tion is received.  
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
5
Touch the desired theater.  
The movie titles currently shown on the se-  
lected theater are displayed.  
6
Touch the desired tab to change the  
sort order.  
Available options:  
6
Touch on the item that you want to  
view in detail.  
!
Dist. (default):  
p Touching  
allows you to check the loca-  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
Name:  
tion on a map.  
Touch [Refresh].  
#
!
The information is updated.  
p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-  
tion is received.  
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
7
Touch on the item that you want to  
view in detail.  
7
Touch [OK].  
p Touching  
allows you to check the loca-  
Location confirmation screen appears.  
= For details, refer to Setting a route to your  
destination on page 41.  
tion on a map.  
8
Touch [OK].  
Location confirmation screen appears.  
#
Touch [Call].  
53  
En  
 
Chapter  
10  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
Enables you to call the position if a telephone  
number is available. (Pairing with cellular phone  
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is re-  
quired.)  
Browsing weather  
information  
Local weather information can be displayed  
on a list. Switching the screen allows you to  
see worldwide weather conditions.  
#
Touch [Forecast].  
Displays the weather forecasts for these three  
days.  
Checking worldwide weather  
conditions  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates weather information, the information  
provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-  
tual weather conditions. Please refer to Notice  
about MSN Direct on page 50.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
2
Touch [MSN Direct].  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
Checking the local weather  
information  
3
Touch [Weather].  
The local weather information is displayed.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
4
Touch [Worldwide].  
Worldwide weather conditions are displayed.  
The area names and weather conditions are  
displayed on the list. The list is sorted alphabe-  
tically by the area name.  
2
Touch [MSN Direct].  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Weather].  
5
Touch the desired area.  
The local weather information is displayed.  
Detailed information is displayed.  
How to read MSN Direct  
information on the map  
MSN Direct icons can be displayed on the  
map.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the MSN Di-  
rect icons on page 157.  
p MSN Direct icons are not displayed when  
the map scale is 0.75 mile (1 kilometer) or  
more.  
The city name, weather, temperature and wind  
direction are displayed in list format.  
p If there is no information available,  
or  
“–––––” is displayed.  
4
Touch the desired area.  
Detailed information is displayed.  
54  
En  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
10  
when you are traveling along a route and the  
MSN Direct icon  
system finds a better route to avoid traffic con-  
gestion.  
The system acquires the traffic information up  
to 100 miles in radius from the vehicle posi-  
tion. (If there is a lot of traffic information  
around your vehicle, the radius will be shorter  
than 100 miles.)  
The term “traffic congestion” in this section in-  
dicates the following types of traffic informa-  
tion: slow, queuing and stationary traffic and  
closed/blocked roads. This information is al-  
ways taken into consideration when checking  
your route, and the information related with  
these events cannot be turned off. If you select  
other traffic information in “Traffic Settings”,  
the information can be displayed in a list or on  
a map.  
The following MSN Direct icons appear in the  
map screen.  
!
Gas Prices  
: Indicates gas stations whose gas prices  
exceed average prices of all gas stations  
that are received.  
: Indicates gas stations whose gas prices  
equal or go below average prices of all gas  
stations that are received.  
: Indicates gas stations without any price  
information.  
= For details, refer to Selecting traffic informa-  
tion to display on page 59.  
!
!
Movie Times  
: Indicates the locations of movie thea-  
ters.  
Checking all traffic information  
Traffic information except traffic flow informa-  
tion is displayed onscreen in a list.  
Local Events  
: Indicates the locations of music events.  
: Indicates the locations of performing  
arts events.  
: Indicates the locations of visual arts  
events.  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates traffic information, the information pro-  
vided may not necessarily correspond to actual  
traffic conditions. Please refer to Notice about  
MSN Direct on page 50.  
: Indicates the locations of spectator  
events.  
: Indicates the locations of other  
events.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Using traffic information  
2
Touch [MSN Direct].  
You can view current traffic conditions and in-  
formation. When the navigation system re-  
ceives updated traffic information, it will  
overlay the traffic information on your map  
and also display detailed text information  
when available.  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Traffic Events].  
The “Traffic Event List” screen appears.  
The navigation system takes into account traf-  
fic information and tries to avoid traffic con-  
gestion and suggests better routes. Also,  
55  
En  
 
Chapter  
10  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
Current order is indicated on the upper right of  
the screen.  
4
Select an incident you want to view in  
detail.  
#
Touch [Refresh].  
When new traffic information is received, current  
information is changed or old information has  
been removed, the list is updated to reflect the  
new situation.  
5
Touch  
.
The previous screen returns.  
The details of the selected incident are dis-  
played.  
p Touching an incident you want to see allows  
you to view the detailed information of the  
incident. If the information cannot be dis-  
played on one screen, touch or to view  
the remaining information.  
Checking traffic information on  
the route  
All traffic information on the current route (in-  
cluding traffic flow information) is displayed  
onscreen in a list.  
p Touching  
allows you to check the loca-  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
tion on a map. (Traffic information without  
positional information cannot be checked  
on a map.)  
2
Touch [MSN Direct].  
#
Touch [Sort].  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
You can sort the traffic information.  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
3
Touch [Traffic On Route].  
The “Traffic On Route” screen appears.  
The method for checking the content dis-  
played on the screen is the same for Checking  
all traffic information on the previous page.  
!
:
You can sort the traffic information by dis-  
tance from your current position.  
For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-  
fic Events], the list will be sorted according  
to the linear distance from the vehicle posi-  
tion to the traffic information.  
For the list displayed when you touch [Traf-  
fic On Route], the list will be sorted accord-  
ing to the distance from the vehicle position  
to the traffic information.  
How to read traffic information  
on the map  
The traffic event information displayed on the  
map is as follows.  
p A line is displayed only when the map scale  
is 2.5 miles (5 km) or lower.  
p Icon appears only when the scale on the  
map is 10 miles (20 km) or lower. If the  
scale is changed, the icons are resized ac-  
cording to the selected scale.  
!
!
:
You can sort the traffic information in alpha-  
betical order.  
:
You can sort the traffic information accord-  
ing to the incident.  
The list will be sorted in the order of closed/  
blocked roads, traffic congestion, acci-  
dents, road works and others.  
56  
En  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
10  
played on one screen, touch or to view  
the remaining information.  
p Touching allows you to check the loca-  
tion on a map. (Traffic information without  
positional information cannot be checked  
on a map.)  
#
Touch [Sort].  
You can sort the traffic information.  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
Traffic event icon  
!
!
!
!
with yellow line:  
Stop-and-go traffic  
with red line:  
!
!
!
:
You can sort the traffic information by the  
linear distance from your current position.  
:
You can sort the traffic information in alpha-  
betical order.  
Stopped traffic  
with black line:  
Closed/blocked roads  
etc.:  
:
Accidents, constructions, etc.  
You can sort the traffic information by the  
average speed.  
p For meanings of other icons, check them  
the “Traffic Type Settings” screen.  
The list will be sorted in the order of closed/  
blocked roads, traffic congestion, acci-  
dents, road works and others.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Select-  
ing traffic information to display on page 59.  
Current order is indicated on the upper right of  
the screen.  
Viewing the traffic flow  
#
Touch [Refresh].  
All traffic flow information is displayed on  
screen in a list.  
When new traffic information is received, current  
information is changed or old information has  
been removed, the list is updated to reflect the  
new situation.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
#
Touch  
.
The traffic event information displayed on the  
map is as follows.  
2
Touch [MSN Direct].  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Traffic Flow].  
A list with traffic flow information that has  
been received is shown. The list is sorted by  
distance from your current position.  
Places (street names) where incidents have  
occurred are displayed on the list.  
4
Select an incident you want to view in  
Traffic flow icon and line  
detail.  
!
!
Red: average speed in this area is slower  
than 15 mph (24 km/h)  
Yellow: average speed in this area is be-  
tween 15 mph to 45 mph (24 km/h to 72 km/  
h)  
The details of the selected incident are dis-  
played.  
p Touching an incident you want to see allows  
you to view the detailed information of the  
incident. If the information cannot be dis-  
57  
En  
 
Chapter  
10  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
!
Green: average speed in this area is faster  
than 45 mph (72 km/h) (An icon without a  
line will be displayed)  
1
Touch [New].  
The recommended route is displayed on the  
screen.  
#
Touch [Current].  
The current route is displayed on the screen.  
Setting an alternative route to  
avoid traffic congestion  
The navigation system checks at regular inter-  
vals whether or not there is the traffic informa-  
tion on your route. If the navigation system  
detects any traffic congestion on your current  
route, the system tries to find a better route in  
the background.  
p The following types of traffic incidents on  
the route will be checked: slow, back ups,  
stationary traffic, and closed/blocked roads  
except for closed freeway exits/entrances.  
2
Touch [OK].  
The displayed route is set.  
p When no selection is made, the screen re-  
turns to the previous screen.  
Checking traffic information manually  
Touching the notification icon on the map  
screen allows you to check traffic information  
on your route while the icon is displayed. The  
notification icon is only displayed on the navi-  
gation map screen if there is any traffic infor-  
mation on your route.  
p The notification icon is not available if your  
vehicle deviates from the route.  
Checking for traffic congestion  
automatically  
If there is information about traffic congestion  
on your current route and if an alternative  
route can be found, the navigation system will  
recommend a new alternative route automati-  
cally. In such a case, the following screen will  
appear.  
1
Set [Show Traffic Incident] to “View”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the traffic no-  
tification icon on page 155.  
2
Display the map screen.  
The icon appears when the system acquires  
traffic information on the current route.  
3
Touch the icon while the icon is dis-  
played.  
Notification icon  
1
2
1 Difference in distance and travel time between  
the existing route and new route.  
2 Distance from the current position of your ve-  
hicle to the point of entry into the new route.  
p There is no action if the system cannot find  
any traffic congestion information on your  
route or the system cannot find an alterna-  
tive.  
Traffic information on the current route is dis-  
played on the map screen.  
58  
En  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
10  
4
Touch [Diversion] to search for an alter-  
3
Touch [Traffic Settings].  
native route.  
The “Traffic Settings” screen appears.  
4
Touch [Displayed Traffic Information].  
After touching [Diversion], the route is recal-  
culated taking all traffic congestion on your  
current route into account.  
The “Traffic Type Settings” screen appears.  
Touch the traffic information item to  
p [Diversion] will be available only when the  
5
system can find traffic congestion.  
display.  
p Notification icon shows the nearest traffic  
information on the route. However, if you  
touch [Diversion], the route is recalculated  
by taking into account not only this infor-  
mation, but also all traffic congestion infor-  
mation on the route.  
A check mark appears next to the selected  
traffic information.  
#
Touch [All] or [None].  
Selects or deselects all entries.  
6
Touch [OK].  
For the subsequent operations, refer to Check-  
ing for traffic congestion automatically.  
= For details, refer to Checking for traffic con-  
gestion automatically on the previous page.  
#
Touch [List].  
The “Traffic On Route” screen appears.  
Touch  
#
.
The message disappears, and the map screen re-  
turns.  
The selected traffic information icon is added  
to the screen.  
Selecting traffic information to  
display  
7
Touch [OK].  
There are different types of traffic information  
that can be received via the MSN Direct ser-  
vice, and you can select which types will be in-  
corporated and displayed on your navigation  
system.  
Browsing local events  
The nearby events to be held in the next few  
days are displayed on a list, and you can see  
the detail event information.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates local event information, the information  
provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-  
tual local event conditions. Please refer to No-  
tice about MSN Direct on page 50.  
2
Touch [MSN Direct].  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
59  
En  
 
Chapter  
10  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
#
Touch [Refresh].  
1
2
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
The information is updated.  
p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-  
tion is received.  
Touch [MSN Direct].  
9
Touch [OK].  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Local Events].  
The “Local Event Date” screen appears.  
1
4
Touch the date on which you want to  
2
3
check the events.  
4
1 Address  
2 Start date, time and duration  
3 Telephone number  
4 Event name  
p If there is no information available,  
“–––––” is displayed.  
Location confirmation screen appears.  
= For details, refer to Setting a route to your  
destination on page 41.  
Touch [Call].  
The “Local Event Groups List” screen ap-  
pears.  
5
Touch the category of events that you  
#
want to check.  
Enables you to call the position if a telephone  
number is available. (Pairing with cellular phone  
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is re-  
quired.)  
The “Local Event Sub Groups List” screen ap-  
pears.  
6
Touch the subcategory of events that  
you want to check.  
The “Local Events” screen appears.  
If there is no data, “Unknown” or “–––––” is  
displayed.  
Browsing news headlines  
Recent news headlines are displayed in a list.  
7
Touch the desired tab to change the  
sort order.  
Available options:  
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-  
dates news headlines, the information pro-  
vided may not necessarily correspond to  
current news headlines. Please refer to Notice  
about MSN Direct on page 50.  
!
Dist. (default):  
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-  
tance from the vehicle position.  
Name:  
!
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
8
Touch the desired event to display de-  
tailed information of the event.  
The “Detailed Information” screen appears.  
2
Touch [MSN Direct].  
p Touching  
allows you to check the loca-  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
tion on a map.  
60  
En  
 
Chapter  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
10  
3
4
Touch [News].  
Selecting stock symbols  
Up to 30 stock symbols can be selected.  
Touch the desired news headline.  
Further details about the news are displayed.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
2
Touch [MSN Direct].  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Stocks].  
The “Stock Info” screen appears.  
p The seven stock indices is always selected  
#
Touch [Refresh].  
and displayed on the bottom of the list.  
The information is updated.  
p [Refresh] appears when the new informa-  
tion is received.  
4
Touch [Add].  
The “Stock Info” screen appears.  
5
Touch  
or  
to scroll the list.  
5
Enter the stock symbol that you want  
to select, and then touch [OK].  
The selected stock symbol is added to the  
“Stock Info” screen.  
p If the stock for the selected symbol is not  
found, a message is displayed. To search  
again, touch “Yes” and enter the symbol.  
Viewing the detailed stock quotes  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Browsing stock quotes  
Recent stock quotes are displayed in a list.  
2
Touch [MSN Direct].  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
Although the stock quote displayed onscreen  
is updated about 40 minutes (approx.), these  
prices are not realtime values.  
3
Touch [Stocks].  
The “Stock Info” screen appears.  
It may take up to 20 minutes for all the data to  
become available under the following condi-  
tions:  
1
2
3
!
!
When you use MSN Direct for the first time.  
When you have not performed this function  
previously around the current area.  
After the navigation system has been  
turned off for a few days.  
4
!
Please refer to Notice about MSN Direct on  
page 50.  
1 Symbol  
Displays stock symbols.  
61  
En  
 
Chapter  
10  
Browsing information on MSN Direct  
2 Latest Price  
5
Touch [Delete].  
Displays the most recent stock prices.  
p If there is no data, “–––––” is displayed.  
3 Change since last closing price  
Displays change from the day before.  
p If there is no data, “–––––” is displayed.  
4 Timestamp  
The message confirming whether to delete the  
entry appears.  
6
Touch [Yes].  
Deletes the stock symbol from the “Stock  
Info” screen.  
Displays the time of the latest stock prices.  
When the market is closed, “Market  
Closed ” is displayed.  
p If there is no data, “–––––” is displayed.  
p Arrow in the left of each item indicates the  
stock price movement. If there is no stock  
price movements than previous close, “—”  
is displayed.  
4
Touch the desired stock quote.  
Detailed stock quote information is displayed.  
#
Touch [Delete].  
The message confirming whether to delete the  
entry appears.  
And then touch [Yes] to delete the stock symbol  
from the “Stock Info” screen.  
Deleting registered stocks  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
2
Touch [MSN Direct].  
The “MSN Direct” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Stocks].  
4
Touch the desired stock quote.  
Detailed stock quote information is displayed.  
62  
En  
 
Chapter  
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device  
11  
If your devices feature Bluetoothâ technology,  
this navigation system can be connected to  
your devices wirelessly. This section describes  
how to set up a Bluetooth connection.  
Registering your Bluetooth  
devices  
You need to register your devices featuring  
Bluetooth wireless technology when you con-  
nect it for the first time. A total of 5 devices  
can be registered. Three registration methods  
are available:  
For details about the connectivity with the de-  
vices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology,  
refer to the information on our website.  
!
!
!
Searching for nearby Bluetooth devices  
Searching for a specified Bluetooth device  
Pairing from your Bluetooth devices  
p If you try to register more than 5 devices,  
the system will ask you to select one of the  
registered devices to delete.  
Preparing communication  
devices  
This navigation system has a built-in function  
to use devices featuring Bluetooth wireless  
technology.  
= For details, refer to Deleting a registered  
device on page 66.  
= For details, refer to Notes for hands-free  
phoning on page 75.  
You can register and use devices that feature  
the following profiles with this navigation sys-  
tem.  
Searching for nearby Bluetooth  
devices  
The system searches for available Bluetooth  
devices near the navigation system, displays  
them in a list, and registers them for connec-  
tion.  
!
!
HFP (Hands Free Profile)  
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Pro-  
file)  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
p If the registered device features both HFP  
and A2DP, the hands-free connection is  
made and then the Bluetooth Audio con-  
nection is made.  
nology on your devices.  
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific action  
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless  
technology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your devices.  
If the registered device features either pro-  
file, the corresponding connection is made.  
p When the navigation system is turned off,  
the Bluetooth connection is also discon-  
nected. When the system restarts, the sys-  
tem automatically attempts to reconnect  
the previously-connected device. Even  
when the connection is severed for some  
reason, the system automatically recon-  
nects the specified device (except when the  
connection is severed due to device oper-  
ation).  
2
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
3
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
4
Touch [Registration].  
The “Nearby Device List” screen appears.  
The system searches for devices featuring  
Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the  
connection and displays them in the list if a  
device is found.  
p Up to 30 devices will be listed in the order  
that the devices are found.  
63  
En  
 
Chapter  
11  
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device  
The system searches for devices featuring Blue-  
5
Wait until your Bluetooth device ap-  
tooth technology that are waiting for the connec-  
tion and displays them in the list if a device is  
found.  
pears in the list.  
7
Enter the PIN code (the default PIN  
code is “1111”) using the Bluetooth device.  
Enter the PIN code while the message “Please  
follow the instructions on your mobile  
phone.” appears.  
The device is registered in the navigation sys-  
tem.  
After the device is successfully registered, the  
Bluetooth connection is established from the  
navigation system.  
Pairing from your Bluetooth  
devices  
You can register the Bluetooth device by set-  
ting the navigation system to standby mode  
and requesting connection from the Bluetooth  
device.  
p If you cannot find the Bluetooth device that  
you want to connect, check that the device  
is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology connection.  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology on your devices.  
6
Touch the Bluetooth device name you  
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific action  
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless  
technology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your devices.  
want to register.  
2
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
3
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
4
Touch [Registration].  
The “Nearby Device List” screen appears.  
5
Touch [Register from mobile phone].  
The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth  
wireless technology connection.  
#
Touch [Search Again].  
64  
En  
 
Chapter  
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device  
11  
6
Touch the Bluetooth device name to be  
connected.  
6
Register the navigation system on your  
Bluetooth device.  
If your device asks you to enter a password,  
enter the PIN code (password) of the naviga-  
tion system.  
When the device is successfully registered,  
the connection settings are made from the de-  
vice.  
The system searches for devices featuring  
Bluetooth technology that are waiting for the  
connection and displays them in the list if a  
device is found.  
p If you cannot find the desired device name  
on the list, touch [Other phones] to search  
the devices available nearby.  
p If registration fails, repeat the procedure  
from the beginning.  
7
Wait until your Bluetooth device ap-  
pears in the list.  
Searching for a specified  
Bluetooth device  
If you cannot connect your Bluetooth device  
using the nearby device search and [Register  
from mobile phone], try this method if your  
Bluetooth device is found in the list.  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology on your devices.  
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific action  
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless  
technology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your devices.  
2
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
3
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
p If you cannot find the Bluetooth device that  
you want to connect, check that the device  
is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology connection.  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
4
Touch [Registration].  
The “Nearby Device List” screen appears.  
5
Touch [Select specific devices].  
The “Select specific devices” screen appears.  
65  
En  
 
Chapter  
11  
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device  
8
Touch the Bluetooth device name you  
1
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
want to register.  
2
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Registration].  
A message prompting you to delete a regis-  
tered device appears.  
4
Touch [OK].  
The “Delete from Connection List” screen  
appears.  
#
Touch [Search Again].  
The system searches for devices featuring Blue-  
tooth technology that are waiting for the connec-  
tion and displays them in the list if a device is  
found.  
5
Touch the Bluetooth device name that  
you want to delete.  
9
Enter the PIN code (the default PIN  
code is “1111”) using the Bluetooth device.  
Enter the PIN code while the message “Please  
follow the instructions on your mobile  
phone.” appears.  
The device is registered in the navigation sys-  
tem.  
After the device is successfully registered, the  
Bluetooth connection is established from the  
navigation system.  
The registration is canceled.  
Connecting a registered  
Bluetooth device  
The navigation system automatically connects  
the Bluetooth device selected as the target of  
connection. However, connect the Bluetooth  
device manually in the following cases:  
Deleting a registered device  
When you have already registered 5 Bluetooth  
devices and you want to add another one, you  
must first delete one of the registered devices.  
p If a registered phone is deleted, all the  
phone book entries and call history lists  
that correspond to the phone will be also  
cleared.  
!
Two or more Bluetooth devices are regis-  
tered, and you want to manually select the  
device to be used.  
66  
En  
 
Chapter  
Registering and connecting a Bluetooth device  
11  
!
!
You want to reconnect a disconnected  
Bluetooth device.  
Connection cannot be established automa-  
tically for some reason.  
You can select the following profiles:  
!
!
!
Handsfree and Audio:  
Connects the device as the hands-free  
phone and the Bluetooth audio player.  
Audio:  
Connects the device as Bluetooth audio  
player.  
If you start connection manually, carry out the  
following procedure. You can also connect the  
Bluetooth device by having the navigation sys-  
tem detect it automatically.  
Handsfree:  
Connects the device as the hands-free  
phone.  
Connection starts.  
When a connection is successfully estab-  
lished, a connection complete message ap-  
pears and the map screen returns by touching  
[OK].  
1
Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-  
nology on your devices.  
For some Bluetooth devices, no specific action  
is necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless  
technology. For details, refer to the instruction  
manual of your devices.  
p To cancel the connection to your device,  
2
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
touch [Cancel].  
p If connection fails, check whether your de-  
vice is waiting for a connection and then  
retry.  
3
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
Setting for priority connecting  
The selected device is set for priority connect-  
ing.  
And one of the following icons is indicated  
next to the device name.  
4
Touch [Connection].  
The “Connection List” screen appears.  
5
Touch the name of the device that you  
want to connect.  
!
:
Appears when the device is registered so  
that it will be preferentially paired with both  
the hand-free and Bluetooth audio connec-  
tion.  
!
!
:
Appears when the device is registered so  
that it can be preferentially paired with the  
hand-free connection.  
The “Select Profile” screen appears.  
:
6
Touch the profile that you want to con-  
Appears when the device is registered so  
that it will be preferentially paired with the  
Bluetooth audio connection.  
nect.  
67  
En  
 
Chapter  
12  
Using hands-free phoning  
2 Network name of the cellular phone com-  
pany  
3 Strength of the Bluetooth connection be-  
tween the navigation system and the device  
4 Reception status of the cellular phone  
5 Battery status of the cellular phone  
CAUTION  
For your safety, avoid talking on the phone as  
much as possible while driving.  
If your cellular phone features Bluetooth tech-  
nology, this navigation system can be con-  
nected to your cellular phone wirelessly. Using  
this hands-free function, you can operate the  
navigation system to make or receive phone  
calls. You can also transfer the phone book  
data stored in your cellular phone to the navi-  
gation system. This section describes how to  
set up a Bluetooth connection and how to op-  
erate a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth  
technology on the navigation system.  
Making a phone call  
You can make a phone call in many different  
ways.  
Direct dialing  
1
Display the “Phone Menu” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Menu on this page.  
For details about the connectivity with the de-  
vices featuring Bluetooth wireless technology,  
refer to the information on our website.  
2
Touch [Dial Pad].  
The “Dial Input” screen appears.  
3
Touch the number keys to enter the  
phone number.  
Displaying the Phone Menu  
Use the “Phone Menu” if you connect the cel-  
lular phone to the navigation system for utiliza-  
tion.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Regis-  
tering and connecting a Bluetooth device on  
page 63.  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
The phone number that was input is dis-  
played.  
“Top Menu” screen.  
And then [OK] is activated.  
2
Touch [Phone].  
#
Touch  
.
The “Phone Menu” screen appears.  
The input number is deleted a digit at a time from  
the end of the number. Continuing to press this  
deletes all of the digits.  
2
3 45  
1
#
Touch  
.
The previous screen returns.  
4
5
Touch [OK] to make a call.  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
dialing, touch  
.
Touch to end the call.  
1 Name of connected cellular phone  
68  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
Making a call home easily  
You can call home without taking the time to  
enter the phone number if the phone number  
has been registered.  
12  
4
Switch the page of the list to display  
the desired entry.  
1
Display the “Phone Menu” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Menu on the previous page.  
2
Touch [Call Home].  
Dialing home starts.  
#
Touch alphabet tabs.  
p If you have not registered your home num-  
ber, a message appears. Touch [Register]  
to start registration.  
Makes the screen jump to the beginning of the  
page including the entry whose names start with  
any of selected letters or numbers.  
Touching [#ABCDE] also displays the page in-  
cluding the entry whose names start with primary  
symbols or numbers.  
= For details, refer to Registering your  
home on page 152.  
Calling a number in the  
“Contacts List”  
Touching [Others] displays the page including  
entries that are not assigned to any of the other  
tabs.  
After finding the entry you want to call in the  
“Contacts List” screen, you can select the  
number and make the call.  
p Before using this function, you need to  
transfer the phone book entries stored in  
your cellular phone to the navigation sys-  
tem.  
5
Touch the desired entry on the list to  
make a call.  
p If the entry has multiple phone number  
data, a selection list appears.  
6
Touch  
to end the call.  
= For details, refer to Transferring the phone  
book on page 72.  
Dialing from the history  
1
2
Display the “Phone Menu” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Menu on the previous page.  
The most recent calls made (dialed), received  
and missed are stored in the call history list.  
You can browse the call history list and call  
numbers from it.  
p Each call history saves 30 calls per regis-  
tered cellular phone. If the number of calls  
exceeds 30, the oldest entry will be deleted.  
Touch [Contacts].  
The “Contacts List” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Search].  
The “Contacts Name Search” screen appears.  
You can search by the names registered in the  
“Contacts List” screen.  
1
Display the “Phone Menu” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Menu on the previous page.  
2
Touch [Received Calls], [Dialed Calls] or  
[Missed Calls].  
The selected call history list appears.  
69  
En  
 
Chapter  
12  
Using hands-free phoning  
3
Touch an entry on the list.  
Dialing the entry stored in the  
“Favorites” list  
You can make a call to the entry stored in the  
“Favorites” list.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
2
Touch [Favorites].  
Dialing starts.  
p To cancel the call after the system starts  
The “Favorites” screen appears.  
dialing, touch  
.
3
Touch next to the location that you  
#
Touch [Detail].  
want to make a call.  
The “Detailed Information” screen appears.  
The “Edit Favorite” screen appears.  
4
Touch [Call] to make a call.  
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-  
ing, touch  
.
5
Touch  
to end the call.  
Dialing a facility’s phone number  
You can make a call to facilities with phone  
number data.  
You can check the details of the party before mak-  
ing a phone call.  
p You cannot make a call to locations or POIs  
that have no phone number data.  
4
Touch  
to end the call.  
1
Display the “Destination Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Dialing GOOG-411  
CAUTION  
Local and/or long distance charges for making a  
phone call may apply.  
2
Touch [POI].  
The “POI Search” screen appears.  
You can dial GOOG-411 to dial the free busi-  
ness listing service of Googleä with one  
touch.  
3
Search for the POI.  
The “POI List” screen appears.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Search-  
ing for Points of Interest (POI) on page 36.  
1
Touch [GOOG-411] on the “Phone  
Menu”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
4
Touch  
next to the POI that you want  
to call.  
Menu on page 68.  
Dialing GOOG-411 starts.  
The “Detailed POI Information” screen ap-  
pears.  
2
You can now use the GOOG-411 phone  
5
Touch [Call] to make a call.  
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-  
ing, touch  
service.  
For details about GOOG-411 service and avail-  
ability, contact Google.  
.
6
Touch  
to end the call.  
70  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
Dialing from the map  
You can make a call by selecting the icon of a  
registered location or a POI icon from the map  
screen.  
12  
p The registered name appears if the phone  
number of the received call is already regis-  
tered in “Contacts”.  
p Depending on the caller ID service, the  
phone number of the received call may not  
be displayed. “Unknown” appears instead.  
p You cannot make a call to locations or POIs  
that have no phone number data.  
1
To answer an incoming call, touch  
The operation menu during a call appears.  
Touch [Vol –] or [Vol +].  
You can adjust the ring tone volume.  
.
1
Scroll the map, and place the cursor on  
an icon on the map.  
#
2
Touch  
.
#
Touch  
to reject an incoming call.  
The “Detailed POI Information” screen ap-  
p The rejected call is recorded in the missed  
call history list.  
= For details, refer to Dialing from the history  
on page 69.  
pears.  
3
Touch [Call] to make a call.  
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-  
ing, touch  
.
2
Touch  
to end the call.  
4
Touch  
to end the call.  
Receiving a phone call  
You can perform hands-free answering by  
using the navigation system.  
Answering an incoming call  
The system informs you that it is receiving a  
call by displaying a message and producing a  
ring sound.  
The call ends.  
p If the voice on the other end of the call is  
too quiet to hear, you can adjust the volume  
of the received voice.  
= For details, refer to Setting the Volume  
for Guidance and Phone on page 163.  
p You may hear a noise when you hang up  
the phone.  
#
Touch [Vol –] or [Vol +].  
You can adjust volume when you are talking.  
Touch [Close Menu].  
The operation menu during call is minimized.  
#
If “Auto Answer Preference” is set to “Off”,  
answer the call manually. Answering is avail-  
able if any screen is displayed, such as the  
map screen or the setting screen.  
p You can set this navigation system to auto-  
matically answer incoming calls.  
= For details, refer to Answering a call  
automatically on page 74.  
To display the menu again, touch  
.
71  
En  
 
Chapter  
12  
Using hands-free phoning  
Transferring the phone book  
3
Check that the following screen is dis-  
played, and operate your cellular phone to  
transfer the phone book entries.  
You can transfer the phone book entries from  
your cellular phone to the phone book of navi-  
gation system.  
p Depending on the cellular phone, Phone  
Book may be called Contacts, Business  
card or something else.  
p With some cellular phones, it may not be  
possible to transfer the entire phone book  
at once. In this case, transfer addresses  
one at a time from your phone book using  
your cellular phone.  
p If you connect the cellular phone featuring  
auto-synchronization function, phone book  
transfer or synchronization will be automa-  
tically performed.  
p A maximum of 1 000 entries can be trans-  
ferred per cellular phone. If the entries ex-  
ceed 1 000, the extra entries will not be  
transferred. If more than one number is re-  
gistered for one person, such as work place  
and home, each number may be counted  
separately.  
After transferring the data is finished, a mes-  
sage asking whether you want to transfer  
more data appears.  
Touch [Yes] to continue the transfer.  
4
Touch [No].  
p Each entry can hold up to 5 phone num-  
bers.  
The transferred data is imported to the naviga-  
tion system.  
When the data is successfully imported, an  
import complete message is displayed and the  
“Contacts List” screen appears.  
p Depending on the cellular phone that is  
connected to this navigation system via  
Bluetooth technology, this navigation sys-  
tem may not be able to display the phone  
book correctly. (Some characters may be  
garbled.)  
p If the phone book in the cellular phone con-  
tains image data, the phone book may not  
be correctly transferred.  
p It may take time depending on how many  
entries will be transferred.  
p The transferred data cannot be edited on  
the navigation system.  
1
Connect the cellular phone that has the  
phone book to transfer.  
= For details, refer to Connecting a registered  
Bluetooth device on page 66.  
2
Touch [Contacts Transfer] on the  
“Phone Menu” screen.  
72  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
Deleting registered contacts  
12  
4
Touch  
to delete the current name,  
and enter the new name by using the key-  
board.  
1
Display the “Phone Menu” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the Phone  
Menu on page 68.  
2
Touch [Contacts].  
The “Contacts List” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Delete].  
The “Delete from Contacts” screen appears.  
4
Touch the entry you want to delete.  
5
Touch [OK].  
A check mark appears next to the entry.  
Touch [All] or [None].  
Selects or deselects all entries.  
The name is changed.  
#
p Up to 16 characters can be entered for a de-  
vice name.  
5
Touch [Delete].  
The message confirming whether to delete the  
entry appears.  
Editing the password  
You can change the password to be used for  
authentication on your cellular phone. (De-  
fault is “1111”.)  
p Four to eight characters can be entered for  
a password.  
6
Touch [Yes].  
The entry is deleted.  
Touch [No].  
#
Cancels the deletion.  
1
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Changing the phone settings  
Editing the device name  
You can change the device name to be dis-  
played on your cellular phone. (Default is  
“PIONEER NAVI”.)  
2
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Password].  
The “Set Password” screen appears.  
1
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
4
Touch any key to enter the password  
you want to set and then touch [OK].  
2
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
Stopping Bluetooth wave  
transmission  
3
Touch [Device Name].  
The keyboard to enter the name appears.  
You can stop transmission of electric waves by  
turning off the Bluetooth function. If you do  
not use the Bluetooth wireless technology, we  
recommend selecting “Off”.  
73  
En  
 
Chapter  
12  
Using hands-free phoning  
1
2
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
4
Touch the desired option.  
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Bluetooth On/Off].  
Touching [Bluetooth On/Off] switches be-  
tween “On” and “Off”.  
On this screen, you can select the following  
items:  
Echo canceling and noise reduction  
!
!
!
!
!
Off:  
No automatic response. Respond manually.  
Immediately:  
Answers immediately.  
After 3 seconds:  
Answers after three seconds.  
After 6 seconds:  
Answers after six seconds.  
After 10 seconds:  
When you are operating hands-free phoning  
in the vehicle, you may hear an undesirable  
echo. This function reduces the echo and  
noise while you are using hands-free phoning,  
and maintains a certain sound quality.  
1
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Answers after ten seconds.  
2
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
Setting the automatic rejection  
function  
3
Touch [Echo Cancel].  
If this function is on, the navigation system  
automatically rejects all incoming calls.  
Touching [Echo Cancel] switches between  
“On” and “Off”.  
1
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Answering a call automatically  
The navigation system automatically answers  
incoming calls to the cellular phone, so you  
can answer a call while driving without taking  
your hands off the steering wheel.  
2
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Refuse All Calls].  
1
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Touching [Refuse All Calls] switches between  
“On” and “Off”.  
p If both “Refuse All Calls” and “Auto An-  
swer Preference” are activated, “Refuse  
All Calls” takes priority and all incoming  
calls are automatically rejected.  
2
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
p If “Refuse All Calls” is set to “On”, rejected  
incoming calls will not be stored in the  
missed call list.  
3
Touch [Auto Answer Preference].  
The “Auto Answer Preference” screen ap-  
pears.  
74  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using hands-free phoning  
Clearing memory  
12  
Updating the Bluetooth  
wireless technology software  
You can clear the memory of each item that  
corresponds to the connected cellular phone:  
phone book, dialed/received/missed call his-  
tory list and preset dials.  
Update files will be available for download in  
the future. You will be able to download the lat-  
est update from an appropriate website to  
your PC.  
p Before you download the files and install  
the update, read through the instructions  
on the website. Follow the instructions on  
the website for steps until [Firmware up-  
date] becomes active.  
1
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
2
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
3
Touch [Clear Memory].  
card slot.  
The “Clear Memory” screen appears.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 15.  
2
3
Display the “Settings Menu” screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Screen  
switching overview on page 22.  
Touch [Bluetooth Settings].  
The “Bluetooth Settings” screen appears.  
On this screen, you can select the following  
items:  
4
Touch [Firmware update].  
!
!
!
!
Contacts:  
The current version is displayed.  
You can clear the registered phone book.  
Received Calls List:  
You can clear the received call history list.  
Dialed Calls List:  
You can clear the dialed call history list.  
Missed Calls List:  
You can clear the missed call history list.  
#
Touch [Clear All].  
It clears all the data that correspond to the con-  
nected cellular phone.  
5
Touch [Firmware update].  
Update starts.  
4
Touch [Yes].  
Data on the selected item is cleared from this  
navigation system’s memory.  
p If you do not want to clear the memory that  
Notes for hands-free phoning  
General notes  
you have selected, touch [No].  
!
Connection to all cellular phones featuring  
Bluetooth wireless technology is not guar-  
anteed.  
75  
En  
 
Chapter  
12  
Using hands-free phoning  
!
The line-of-sight distance between this na-  
vigation system and your cellular phone  
must be 10 meters or less when sending  
and receiving voice and data via Bluetooth  
technology. However, the actual transmis-  
sion distance may be shorter than the esti-  
mated distance, depending on the usage  
environment.  
With some cellular phones, the ring sound  
may not be output from the speakers.  
If private mode is selected on the cellular  
phone, hands-free phoning may be dis-  
abled.  
names, the name that comes first in the  
phone book is displayed.  
If the phone number of the received call is  
not registered in the phone book, the  
phone number of the received call appears.  
!
The received call history and the dialed  
number history  
!
Calls made or editing performed only on  
your cellular phone will not be reflected to  
the dialed number history or phone book in  
the navigation system.  
You cannot make a call to the entry of an  
unknown user (no phone number) in the re-  
ceived call history.  
If calls are made by operating your cellular  
phone, no history data will be recorded in  
the navigation system.  
!
!
!
!
Registration and connection  
!
Cellular phone operations vary depending  
on the type of cellular phone. Refer to the  
instruction manual that came with your cel-  
lular phone for detailed instructions.  
With cellular phones, phone book transfer  
may not work even though your phone is  
paired with the navigation system. In that  
case, disconnect your phone, perform pair-  
ing again from your phone to the naviga-  
tion system, and then perform the phone  
book transfer.  
Phone book transfers  
!
!
If there are more than 1 000 phone book en-  
tries on your cellular phone, all entries may  
not be downloaded completely.  
!
With some cellular phones, it may not be  
possible to transfer all items in the phone  
book at one time. In this case, transfer  
items one by one from your cellular phone.  
Depending on the cellular phone, this navi-  
gation system may not display the phone  
book correctly. (Some characters may be  
garbled, or first and last names may be re-  
versed.)  
Making and receiving calls  
!
!
You may hear a noise in the following situa-  
tions:  
— When you answer the phone by using  
the button on the phone.  
— When the person on the other end of  
line hangs up the phone.  
!
!
If the phone book in the cellular phone con-  
tains image data, the phone book may not  
be transferred correctly. (Image data can-  
not be transferred from the cellular phone.)  
Depending on the cellular phone, phone  
book transfer may not be available.  
!
!
!
If the person on the other end of the phone  
call cannot hear the conversation due to an  
echo, decrease the volume level for hands-  
free phoning. This may reduce the echo.  
With some cellular phones, even if you  
press the accept button on the cellular  
phone when a call comes in, hands-free  
phoning may not be performed.  
The registered name appears if the phone  
number of the received call is already regis-  
tered in the phone book. When one phone  
number is registered under different  
76  
En  
Chapter  
Basic operations of the AV source  
13  
This chapter describes the basic operations of  
the AV source.  
You can play or use the following sources with  
the navigation system.  
1
Drag a source icon up or down.  
The AV source icons scroll, and hidden icons  
appear.  
2
Tap the icon of the source you want to  
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
TUNER (FM, AM)  
CD  
ROM (in MP3, AAC, WMA)  
DVD-Video  
DivX  
select.  
The operation screen of the selected source  
appears.  
p The icon currently selected is high-  
lighted.  
USB  
SD  
The following sources can be played back or  
used by connecting an auxiliary device.  
Operating list screens (e.g.  
iPod list screen)  
This describes the operations when a list  
screen is displayed.  
p For displaying the list screen, refer to the  
description of the corresponding source.  
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
HD Radio (HD Radio tuner)  
iPod  
Pandora  
Bluetooth Audio  
XM Tuner  
SIRIUS Tuner  
AV input 1 (AV1)  
AV input 2 (AV2)  
External unit 1 (EXT1)  
External unit 2 (EXT2)  
Switching between the AV  
operation screen and the list  
screen  
The following example describes how to  
switch between the AV operation screen and  
the artist list screen of iPod.  
Displaying the AV  
operation screen  
1
Touch the appropriate key to display  
%
Press the MODE button when the map  
the list that you want.  
p For displaying the list screen, refer to the  
screen is displayed.  
p The AV operation screen can also be dis-  
played by touching [AV Source] on the  
“Top Menu”.  
description of the corresponding source.  
Selecting a source  
Source icon  
77  
En  
 
Chapter  
13  
Basic operations of the AV source  
2
Touch the key on the right edge of the  
screen.  
The AV operation screen returns.  
Selecting an item  
1
Scroll by dragging items up or down,  
and display the item you want to select.  
p Flicking a list item enables you to quickly  
scroll through the list.  
To stop scrolling, gently touch the list.  
2
Tap the item.  
p The item currently selected is highlighted.  
Returning to the previous display  
Touch to return to the previous  
%
screen.  
78  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using the radio (FM)  
14  
8 Program service name or frequency indi-  
cator  
You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-  
tion system. This section describes operations  
for radio (FM).  
Shows the frequency of the preset item. If the  
program service name can be obtained, the  
program service name is shown instead of the  
frequency.  
Starting procedure  
9 Preset number indicator  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
2
Tap [FM] on the left edge of the screen  
to display the “FM” screen.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the radio.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on the next page.  
Reading the screen  
2 3 4 5  
6
7
1
8
9
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Band indicator  
Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1  
to FM3.  
3 Program service name indicator  
Shows the program service name (station  
name) of the current station.  
4 Signal level indicator  
5 Frequency indicator  
6 STEREO indicator  
Shows that the frequency selected is being  
broadcast in stereo.  
7 Current time  
79  
En  
 
Chapter  
14  
Using the radio (FM)  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
6
5
2
4
3
1 Performs manual tuning  
3 Recalls equalizer curves  
To tune manually, touch [o] or [p] briefly.  
The frequencies move up or down one step at  
a time.  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 172.  
4 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on the next page.  
5 Switches between the AV operation  
screen and the preset list display  
You can switch the screen display according  
to your preference.  
Performs seek tuning  
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [o]  
or [p] for about one second and release.  
The tuner will scan frequencies until a broad-  
cast strong enough for good reception is  
found.  
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching  
either [o] or [p] briefly.  
p If you touch and hold [o] or [p],  
you can skip broadcasting frequencies.  
Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-  
lease the keys.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Switching between the AV operation  
screen and the list screen on page 77.  
6 Selects an FM band  
Tapping the key repeatedly switches between  
the following FM bands: FM1, FM2, or FM3.  
p This function is convenient for preparing  
different preset lists for each band.  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using the TRK button.  
2 Selects a preset channel  
The keys can be used to switch preset chan-  
nels.  
Scroll by dragging the keys up or down to dis-  
play the preset channel you want to select,  
and tap the channel.  
p The lower key and the upper key appear  
only when the preset channel is se-  
lected.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies  
With a tap of any of the preset tuning keys  
(“P1” to “P6”), you can easily store up to six  
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also  
with the tap of a key).  
80  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using the radio (FM)  
14  
1
Select a frequency that you want to  
1
2
store in memory.  
2
Display the preset channel list.  
= For details, refer to Switches between the  
AV operation screen and the preset list  
display on the previous page.  
3
Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]  
to [P6].  
Preset list display  
1 Stores the strongest broadcast frequen-  
cies  
2 Tunes in strong signals  
= For details of each function, refer to sec-  
tions below with the relative titles.  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
BSM (best stations memory) lets you automa-  
tically store the six strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies under the preset tuning keys “P1” to  
“P6” and, once stored there, you can tune in to  
these frequencies with the touch of a key.  
Preset tuning keys  
= For details of the list operations, refer to Op-  
erating list screens (e.g. iPod list screen) on  
page 77.  
The selected radio station has been stored in  
memory.  
The next time you tap the same preset tuning  
key “P1” to “P6”, the radio station frequencies  
are recalled from memory.  
p Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the  
three FM bands, as well as six AM stations,  
can be stored in memory.  
1
2
3
Touch on the “FM” screen.  
Touch [BSM].  
Touch [Start] to begin a search.  
BSM begins to flash. While “BSM” is flashing,  
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be  
stored under the preset tuning keys “P1” to  
“P6” in order of their signal strength. When  
this is complete, “BSM” stops flashing.  
p To cancel the storage process, touch  
[Stop].  
Using the “Function” menu  
%
Touch on the “FM” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM  
may replace broadcast frequencies you  
have already saved.  
Tuning in strong signals  
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only  
those radio stations with sufficiently strong  
signals for good reception.  
81  
En  
 
Chapter  
14  
Using the radio (FM)  
1
2
3
Touch on the “FM” screen.  
Touch [Local].  
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].  
4
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-  
sitivity.  
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM.  
Level: 1 — 2 — 3 — 4  
p The level “4” setting allows reception of only  
the strongest stations, while lower settings  
let you receive weaker stations.  
82  
En  
Chapter  
Using the radio (AM)  
15  
You can listen to the radio using this naviga-  
tion system. This section describes operations  
for radio (AM).  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
2
Tap [AM] on the left edge of the screen  
to display the “AM” screen.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the radio.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on the next page.  
Reading the screen  
2
3
4
1
5
6
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Signal level indicator  
3 Frequency indicator  
4 Current time  
5 Frequency indicator  
Shows the frequency of the preset item.  
6 Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
83  
En  
 
Chapter  
15  
Using the radio (AM)  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
2
5
4
3
1 Performs manual tuning  
3 Recalls equalizer curves  
To tune manually, touch [o] or [p] briefly.  
The frequencies move up or down one step at  
a time.  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 172.  
4 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on the next page.  
5 Switches between the AV operation  
screen and the preset list display  
You can switch the screen display according  
to your preference.  
Performs seek tuning  
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [o]  
or [p] for about one second and release.  
The tuner will scan frequencies until a broad-  
cast strong enough for good reception is  
found.  
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching  
either [o] or [p] briefly.  
p If you touch and hold [o] or [p],  
you can skip broadcasting frequencies.  
Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-  
lease the keys.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Switching between the AV operation  
screen and the list screen on page 77.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies  
With a tap of any of the preset tuning keys  
(“P1” to “P6”), you can easily store up to six  
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also  
with the tap of a key).  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using the TRK button.  
2 Selects a preset channel  
The keys can be used to switch preset chan-  
nels.  
Scroll by dragging the keys up or down to dis-  
play the preset channel you want to select,  
and tap the channel.  
1
Select a frequency that you want to  
store in memory.  
p The lower key and the upper key appear  
only when the preset channel is se-  
lected.  
84  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using the radio (AM)  
15  
2
3
Display the preset channel list.  
= For details, refer to Switches between the  
AV operation screen and the preset list  
display on the previous page.  
Stores the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
BSM (best stations memory) lets you automa-  
tically store the six strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies under the preset tuning keys “P1” to  
“P6” and, once stored there, you can tune in to  
these frequencies with the touch of a key.  
Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]  
to [P6].  
Preset list display  
1
2
3
Touch on the “AM” screen.  
Touch [BSM].  
Touch [Start] to begin a search.  
BSM begins to flash. While “BSM” is flashing,  
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be  
stored under the preset tuning keys “P1” to  
“P6” in order of their signal strength. When  
this is complete, “BSM” stops flashing.  
p To cancel the storage process, touch  
[Stop].  
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM  
may replace broadcast frequencies you  
have already saved.  
Preset tuning keys  
= For details of the list operations, refer to Op-  
erating list screens (e.g. iPod list screen) on  
page 77.  
The selected radio station has been stored in  
memory.  
The next time you tap the same preset tuning  
key “P1” to “P6”, the radio station frequencies  
are recalled from memory.  
Tunes in strong signals  
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only  
those radio stations with sufficiently strong  
signals for good reception.  
Using the “Function” menu  
%
Touch on the “AM” screen.  
1
2
3
Touch  
on the “AM” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
Touch [Local].  
1
2
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].  
4
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-  
sitivity.  
There are two levels of sensitivity for AM.  
Level: 1 — 2  
p The level “2” setting allows reception of only  
the strongest stations, while lower settings  
let you receive weaker stations.  
1 Stores the strongest broadcast frequen-  
cies  
2 Tunes in strong signals  
= For details of each function, refer to sec-  
tions below with the relative titles.  
85  
En  
 
Chapter  
16  
HD Radioä reception  
4 Signal level indicator  
5 Frequency indicator  
6 Signal type indicator  
You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-  
tion system. This section describes operations  
for HD Radio reception.  
Shows the type of signal currently being re-  
ceived. If a digital broadcasting is received,  
“D” appears. Otherwise, “A” appears.  
7 Blending mode indicator  
= For details, refer to Switching the recep-  
tion mode on page 89.  
p You have to connect an HD Radio tuner (e.  
g. GEX-P20HD) (sold separately) to enable  
reception of HD Radio broadcasts on this  
navigation system.  
For details concerning operation, refer to  
the HD Radio tuner’s operation manual.  
8 Current time  
9 Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
a Seek type indicator  
= For details, refer to Switching the seek  
mode on page 89.  
b Multicasting indicator  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
Shows the number of multicast channels in  
the current frequency.  
2
Tap [Digital Radio] on the left edge of  
the screen to display the “Digital Radio”  
screen.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the radio.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on the next page.  
Reading the screen  
2 3 4 56 7  
8
1
b
9
a
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Band indicator  
Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1,  
FM2, FM3 or AM.  
3 Detailed information  
= For details, refer to Switching the display  
on page 88.  
86  
En  
 
Chapter  
HD Radioä reception  
16  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
7
6
2
5
4
3
1 Performs manual tuning  
4 Recalls equalizer curves  
To tune manually, touch [o] or [p] briefly.  
The frequencies move up or down one step at  
a time.  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 172.  
5 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on the next page.  
6 Switches between the AV operation  
screen and the preset list display  
You can switch the screen display according  
to your preference.  
Performs seek tuning  
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [o]  
or [p] for about one second and release.  
The tuner will scan frequencies until a broad-  
cast strong enough for good reception is  
found.  
p You can cancel seek tuning by touching  
either [o] or [p] briefly.  
p If you touch and hold [o] or [p],  
you can skip broadcasting frequencies.  
Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-  
lease the keys.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Switching between the AV operation  
screen and the list screen on page 77.  
7 Selects a band  
Tap the key repeatedly until the desired band  
is displayed: FM1, FM2, FM3, or AM.  
p This function is convenient for preparing  
different preset lists for each band.  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using the TRK button.  
2 Selects a preset channel  
The keys can be used to switch preset chan-  
nels.  
Scroll by dragging the keys up or down to dis-  
play the preset channel you want to select,  
and tap the channel.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
frequencies  
With a tap of any of the preset tuning keys  
(“Preset 1” to “Preset 6”), you can easily store  
up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall  
(also with the tap of a key).  
3 Switches the display  
= For details, refer to Switching the display  
on the next page.  
87  
En  
 
Chapter  
16  
HD Radioä reception  
1
Select a frequency that you want to  
Scrolling the detailed information  
You can turn the detailed information scroll  
mode on and off.  
store in memory.  
2
Display the preset channel list.  
= For details, refer to Switches between the  
AV operation screen and the preset list  
display on the previous page.  
%
Touch and hold [Disp].  
Using the “Function” menu  
3
Keep touching a preset tuning key [Pre-  
set 1] to [Preset 6].  
%
Touch  
on the “Digital Radio” screen.  
Preset list display  
The “Function” menu appears.  
1
2
3
4
Preset tuning keys  
= For details, refer to Operating list screens (e.  
g. iPod list screen) on page 77.  
The selected radio station has been stored in  
memory.  
The next time you tap the same preset tuning  
key “Preset 1” to “Preset 6”, the radio station  
frequencies are recalled from memory.  
p Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the  
three FM bands, as well as six AM stations,  
can be stored in memory.  
1 Stores the strongest broadcast frequen-  
cies  
2 Switches the seek mode  
3 Tunes in strong signals  
4 Switches the reception mode  
= For details of each function, refer to sec-  
tions below with the relative titles.  
Storing the strongest broadcast  
frequencies  
BSM (best stations memory) lets you automa-  
tically store the six strongest broadcast fre-  
quencies under the preset tuning keys “Preset  
1” to “Preset 6” and, once stored there, you  
can tune in to these frequencies with the  
touch of a key.  
Switching the display  
Desired information can be displayed.  
%
Touch [Disp].  
Touch [Disp] repeatedly to switch between the  
following settings:  
Channel name — Artist name — Song title —  
Program type  
p Only when the tuner has been tuned in to  
an HD Radio station, can the display be  
changed.  
1
2
Touch on the “Digital Radio” screen.  
Touch [BSM].  
p When the tuner has been tuned in to an HD  
Radio station, default display is changed  
into station name instead of frequency.  
88  
En  
 
Chapter  
HD Radioä reception  
16  
3
Touch [Start] to begin a search.  
AM: 1 — 2  
BSM begins to flash. While “BSM” is flashing,  
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be  
stored under the preset tuning keys “Preset 1”  
to “Preset 6” in order of their signal strength.  
When this is complete, “BSM” stops flashing.  
p To cancel the storage process, touch  
[Stop].  
p The FM “4” (AM “2”) setting allows recep-  
tion of only the strongest stations, while  
lower settings let you receive weaker sta-  
tions.  
Switching the reception mode  
If a digital broadcast reception condition gets  
poor, the tuner automatically switches to the  
analog broadcast of the same frequency level  
in default. If you want to prevent a frequent  
automatic switching, switch this setting to  
[Analog].  
p Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM  
may replace broadcast frequencies you  
have already saved.  
Switching the seek mode  
You can select the method of seek tuning.  
1
Touch  
on the “Digital Radio” screen.  
1
Touch on the “Digital Radio” screen.  
2
Touch [Blending] to switch the recep-  
2
Touch [Seek] to select the desired set-  
tion mode.  
ting.  
!
Analog:  
!
All:  
Receives analog broadcasting only.  
D/A Auto:  
Seeks stations from both analog and digital  
!
broadcasting.  
HD:  
Seeks from digital broadcasting only.  
Automatically switches to the analog broad-  
cast of the same frequency level as the digi-  
tal broadcast.  
!
p If you select “HD” on this setting while  
[Blending] is set to “Analog”, the setting  
on [Blending] turns to “D/A Auto” automa-  
tically.  
p If you select “Analog” on this setting while  
[Seek] is set to “HD”, the setting on [Seek]  
turns to “All” automatically.  
Tuning in strong signals  
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only  
those radio stations with sufficiently strong  
signals for good reception.  
1
2
3
Touch on the “Digital Radio” screen.  
Touch [Local].  
Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.  
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].  
4
Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-  
sitivity.  
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and  
two levels for AM:  
FM: 1 — 2 — 3 — 4  
89  
En  
 
Chapter  
17  
Playing audio CDs  
You can play a normal music CD using the  
built-in drive of the navigation system. This  
section describes how.  
!
!
Playing tracks in random order  
Indicator:  
Meaning  
Does not play tracks in ran-  
dom order.  
Starting procedure  
Plays all tracks in the current  
disc in random order.  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
Setting a repeat play range  
Indicator:  
Meaning  
2
Insert the disc you want to play into  
disc-loading slot.  
Repeats the current disc.  
Playback starts from the first track of the CD.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting a disc on page 14.  
p If the disc is already set, tap [Disc] on the  
left edge of the screen.  
Repeats just the current  
track.  
2 Current track information  
!
!
!
!
: Artist name  
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on  
page 77.  
Shows the artist name of the track cur-  
rently playing (when available).  
: Album title  
Shows the title of the album for the cur-  
rent track (when available).  
: Track title  
Shows the title of the track currently  
playing (when available).  
Play time  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the disc.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on the next page.  
Reading the screen  
Shows the elapsed playing time within  
the current track.  
p “-------” is displayed if there is no corre-  
sponding information.  
2
1
3
4
3 Current time  
4 Track information  
5
!
Track number indicator  
Shows the track number and the total  
number of tracks in the current repeat  
range.  
!
Track title indicator  
1 Playback condition indicator  
5 Source icon  
Indicates the current playback condition.  
Shows which source has been selected.  
!
Scanning tracks of a CD  
Indicator:  
Meaning  
Cancels the scan play.  
Plays the beginning of each  
track in the current repeat  
play range for about 10 sec-  
onds.  
90  
En  
 
Chapter  
Playing audio CDs  
17  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
2
3
9
8
4
7
6
5
1 Scans tracks of a CD  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on the next page.  
7 Playback and Pause  
Scan play is performed by touching only one  
key.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Scans tracks of a CD on the next page.  
2 Plays tracks in random order  
All of the tracks in the disc can be played at  
random by touching only one key.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Plays tracks in random order on the  
next page.  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
8 Selects a track from the list  
Touching the key displays the list which lets  
you see the list of track titles on a disc. You  
can play a track on the list by tapping it.  
p “-------” is displayed if there is no corre-  
sponding information.  
3 Sets a repeat play range  
The repeat play range can be changed by  
touching only one key.  
= For details, refer to Changes the repeat  
range on the next page.  
4 Selects a track to play  
Scrolling the keys up or down displays tracks,  
and tapping a track starts playback.  
Tapping the lower key during random play-  
back skips to the next track. Tapping the  
upper key jumps to the start of the current  
track.  
= For details, refer to Operating list screens  
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 77.  
9 Switches the media file type played  
= For details, refer to Switches the  
media file type played on page 96.  
5 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 172.  
6 Displays the “Function” menu  
91  
En  
 
Chapter  
17  
Playing audio CDs  
!
!
!
MODE 1: Activates “Sound Retriever”  
function.  
MODE 2: Activates “Sound Retriever”  
function.  
Off: Deactivates “Sound Retriever”  
function.  
Using the “Function” menu  
%
Touch on the “CD” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
1
2
3
4
p MODE 2 has a stronger effect than  
MODE 1 and is more effective when  
playing back highly compressed audio  
data.  
1 Changes the repeat range  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
!
Disc: Repeats the current disc.  
Track: Repeats just the current track.  
p If you perform track search or fast for-  
ward or reverse, track repeat playback is  
automatically canceled.  
2 Plays tracks in random order  
Each touch of [Random] turns it on or off.  
p If you turn the random play on when the  
repeat play range is set to “Track”, the  
repeat play range changes to “Disc”  
automatically.  
3 Scans tracks of a CD  
Each touch of [Scan] turns it on or off. Scan  
play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of  
each track on the CD. When you find the  
track you want, touch [Scan] to turn scan  
play off.  
p After scanning is finished, normal play-  
back of the tracks will begin again.  
p If you turn the scan play on when the re-  
peat play range is set to “Track”, the re-  
peat play range changes to “Disc”  
automatically.  
4 Uses “Sound Retriever” function  
“Sound Retriever” function automatically  
enhances compressed audio and restores  
rich sound.  
Each touch of [Sound Retriever] changes  
the setting as follows:  
92  
En  
 
Chapter  
Playing music files on ROM  
18  
You can play a disc that contains compressed  
audio files using the built-in drive of the navi-  
gation system. This section describes these  
operations.  
p In the following description, the MP3,  
WMA, AAC files are collectively referred to  
as “Compressed audio file”.  
Indicator:  
Meaning  
Cancels the scan play.  
Plays the first audio files of  
each folder for about 10 sec-  
onds when the repeat range  
is set to “Disc”.  
Plays the beginning of each  
audio file in the current folder  
for about 10 seconds when  
the repeat range is set to  
“Folder”.  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
!
!
Playing files in random order  
Indicator:  
Meaning  
Does not play tracks in ran-  
dom order.  
2
Insert the disc you want to play into  
disc-loading slot.  
Playback starts from the first file of the ROM.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting a disc on page 14.  
p If the disc is already set, tap [Disc] on the  
left edge of the screen.  
Plays all audio files in the cur-  
rent repeat play range in ran-  
dom order.  
Setting a repeat play range  
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on  
page 77.  
Indicator:  
Meaning  
Repeats all compressed  
audio files.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the disc.  
= For details concerning operations, refer to  
Using the touch panel keys on page 95.  
Repeats just the current file.  
Repeats the current folder.  
2 Current file information  
!
!
!
!
: Folder name  
Shows the folder name currently play-  
ing.  
: Artist name  
Shows the artist name currently playing  
(when available).  
Reading the screen  
2
1
3
4
5
: Album title  
Shows the title of the album for the cur-  
rent file (when available).  
: Track title  
Shows the title of the track currently  
playing (when available).  
p If the title of a track is not available,  
the file name appears.  
Play time  
1 Playback condition indicator  
Indicates the current playback condition.  
!
Scanning folders and files  
!
Shows the elapsed playing time within  
the current file.  
93  
En  
 
Chapter  
18  
Playing music files on ROM  
p “-------” is displayed if there is no corre-  
sponding information.  
3 Current time  
4 File information  
!
!
!
File number indicator  
File name indicator  
File type indicator  
Shows the type of audio file.  
5 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
94  
En  
Chapter  
Playing music files on ROM  
Using the touch panel keys  
18  
1
2
3
9
8
4
7
6
5
1 Scans folders and files  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 172.  
6 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on the next page.  
7 Playback and Pause  
Scan play is performed by touching only one  
key.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Scans folders and files on the next  
page.  
2 Plays files in random order  
The files in the current repeat play range can  
be played at random by touching only one key.  
p If the disc contains a mixture of various  
media file types, all tracks or files within  
the current part (“CD” or “ROM”) are  
played randomly.  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
8 Selects a file from the list  
Touching the key displays the list which lets  
you see the list of track titles or folder names  
on a disc.  
p If the title of a track is not available, the  
file name appears.  
= For details, refer to Plays files in ran-  
dom order on the next page.  
Tapping a folder on the list shows its content.  
3 Sets a repeat play range  
You can play a file on the list by tapping it.  
The repeat play range can be changed by  
touching only one key.  
= For details, refer to Changes the repeat  
range on the next page.  
4 Selects a file to play  
Scrolling the keys up or down displays files,  
and tapping a file starts playback.  
Tapping the lower key during random play-  
back skips to the next file. Tapping the upper  
key jumps to the start of the current file.  
5 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Operating list screens  
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 77.  
95  
En  
 
Chapter  
18  
Playing music files on ROM  
Touching displays the content of the upper  
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder  
is listed, cannot be used.  
rently playing data session even if “Disc”  
is selected.  
2 Plays files in random order  
Each touch of [Random] turns it on or off.  
When the random play is turned on, the  
files in the current repeat play range are  
randomly played.  
9 Switches the media file type played  
When playing a disc containing a mixture of  
various media file types, you can switch be-  
tween media file types to play.  
Tap the key repeatedly to switch between the  
following media file types:  
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) — ROM (com-  
pressed audio file) — DivX (DivX video  
files)  
p If you turn the random play on when the  
repeat play range is set to “Track”, the  
repeat play range changes to “Folder”  
automatically.  
3 Scans folders and files  
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds  
of each file. Scan play is performed in the  
current repeat play range.  
Each touch of [Scan] turns it on or off.  
When you find the track you want, touch  
[Scan] to turn the scan play off.  
p After completion of file or folder scan-  
ning, normal playback of the files will  
begin again.  
Using the “Function” menu  
%
Touch on the “ROM” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
1
2
3
4
p If you turn the scan play on when the re-  
peat play range is set to “Track”, the re-  
peat play range changes to “Folder”  
automatically.  
p If you turn the scan play on while the re-  
peat play range is set to “Disc”, scan  
play is performed for only the first tracks  
of each folder.  
1 Changes the repeat range  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
4 Uses “Sound Retriever” function  
“Sound Retriever” function automatically  
enhances compressed audio and restores  
rich sound.  
!
Disc: Repeats all compressed audio  
files.  
!
!
Track: Repeats just the current file.  
Folder: Repeats the current folder.  
Each touch of [Sound Retriever] changes  
the setting as follows:  
p If you select another folder during repeat  
play, the repeat play range changes to  
“Disc”.  
p If you perform fast reverse or fast for-  
ward during “Track”, the repeat play  
range changes to “Folder”.  
p When “Folder” is selected, it is not pos-  
sible to playback a subfolder of that  
folder.  
p When playing discs with compressed  
audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-  
peat play is performed within the cur-  
!
!
!
MODE 1: Activates “Sound Retriever”  
function.  
MODE 2: Activates “Sound Retriever”  
function.  
Off: Deactivates “Sound Retriever”  
function.  
p MODE 2 has a stronger effect than  
MODE 1 and is more effective when  
playing back highly compressed audio  
data.  
96  
En  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-Video  
19  
Shows the current audio channel type, such  
as “Mch” (Multi-channel).  
You can play a DVD-Video using the built-in  
drive of the navigation system. This section de-  
scribes operations for playing a DVD-Video.  
5 Subtitle number indicator  
Shows the subtitle number currently selected.  
6 Subtitle language indicator  
Shows the subtitle language currently se-  
lected.  
7 Viewing angle indicator  
Shows what viewing angle has been selected.  
8 Current time  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
9 Digital sound format indicator  
Shows which digital sound format (surround  
sound format) has been selected.  
a Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current title.  
b Source icon  
2
Insert the disc you want to play into  
disc-loading slot.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting a disc on page 14.  
p If the disc is already set, tap [Disc] on the  
left edge of the screen.  
Shows which source has been selected.  
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on  
page 77.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the disc.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on the next page.  
Reading the screen  
1 2 3 4 5 6  
7
8
9
b
a
1 Title number indicator  
Shows the title number currently playing.  
2 Audio track indicator  
Shows the audio track number and audio lan-  
guage currently selected.  
3 Chapter number indicator  
Shows the chapter number currently playing.  
4 Audio channel indicator  
97  
En  
 
Chapter  
19  
Playing a DVD-Video  
Using the touch panel keys  
Playback screen (page 1)  
1
2
3
b
a
9
8
7
6
5
4
Playback screen (page 2)  
Playback screen (page 3)  
c
d
e
g
f
j
i
h
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-  
played, meaning that the operation is inva-  
lid.  
1 Resumes playback (Bookmark)  
= For details, refer to Resuming playback  
(Bookmark) on the next page.  
Touching [Hide] shows only the current video.  
To display the touch panel keys and informa-  
tion of the current video, touch the screen.  
5 Skips forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
chapter. Touching [o] once skips to the  
start of the current chapter. Touching it twice  
quickly will skip to the previous chapter.  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using the TRK button.  
2 Displays the DVD menu  
You can display the menu by touching [Menu]  
or [Top Menu] while a disc is playing. Touch-  
ing either of these keys again lets you start  
playback from the location selected from the  
menu. For details, refer to the instructions pro-  
vided with the disc.  
6 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
3 Stops playback  
4 Hides the touch panel keys and informa-  
tion of the current video  
7 Displays the DVD menu keypad  
= For details, refer to Using DVD menu by  
touch panel keys on page 100.  
98  
En  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-Video  
19  
8 Switches to the next page of touch panel  
keys  
9 Switches the display  
p During playback of a scene shot from  
multiple angles, the angle icon  
displayed. Turn the angle icon display  
on or off using the “DVD/DivX® Setup”  
menu.  
is  
Touching [Disp] changes the indication on the  
information plate as follows:  
Disc information display — Repeat range and  
L/R select display  
= For details, refer to Setting the angle icon  
display on page 107.  
a Recalls equalizer curves  
i Changes the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)  
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the  
subtitle languages recorded on the disc.  
j Changes the audio track (Multi-audio)  
Each touch of [Audio] switches between  
audio tracks recorded in the disc.  
p DTS audio format cannot be output, so  
select an audio track other than DTS  
audio format.  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 172.  
b Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on page 101.  
c Searches for a desired scene and starts  
playback from a specified time  
= For details, refer to Searching for a speci-  
fic scene and starting playback from a  
specified time on the next page.  
d Performs an operation (such as resuming)  
that is stored on the disc  
p Display indications such as MPEG-A  
and Mch describe the audio track re-  
corded on the DVD. This indication may  
not be the same as the actual sound  
currently output from the navigation sys-  
tem.  
When using a DVD that has a point recorded  
that indicates where to return to, the DVD re-  
turns to the specified point and begins play-  
back from that point.  
Resuming playback (Bookmark)  
The Bookmark function lets you resume play-  
back from a selected scene the next time the  
disc is loaded.  
e Skips the title forward or backward  
Touching [d] skips to the start of the next title.  
Touching [c] skips to the start of the previous  
title.  
f Fast reverse or forward  
%
Touch [BookM.].  
Touch [m] or [n] to perform fast reverse or  
forward.  
If you touch and hold [m] or [n] for five  
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues  
even if you release either of these keys. To re-  
sume playback at a desired point, touch  
[f], [m] or [n] opposite to key pushed  
for five seconds.  
g Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion  
playback)  
You can bookmark one point for each of up to  
five discs. If you try to memorize another point  
for the same disc, the oldest bookmark will be  
overwritten by the newer one.  
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-  
back on page 101.  
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback  
on page 101.  
p To clear the bookmark on a disc, touch and  
hold [BookM.].  
h Changes the viewing angle (Multi-angle)  
Each touch of [Angle] switches between view-  
ing angles.  
99  
En  
 
Chapter  
19  
Playing a DVD-Video  
3
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired  
Searching for a specific scene  
and starting playback from a  
specified time  
number.  
4
While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
You can search for the scene you want by spe-  
cifying a title or a chapter, and the time.  
p Chapter search and time search are not  
available when disc playback has been  
stopped.  
Operating the DVD menu  
You can operate the DVD menu by touching  
the menu item on the screen directly.  
p This function can be used when the  
key is displayed on the lower right corner of  
the LCD screen.  
p This function may not work properly with  
some DVD disc content. In that case, use  
touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu.  
1
Touch [Search] and then touch [Title]  
(title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time] (time).  
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-  
ber or time and then touch [Enter].  
p If you touch the screen while  
is dis-  
played, the touch panel keys will not be dis-  
played.  
1
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
2
Touch [Top Menu] or [Menu] to display  
For titles, chapters  
touch panel keys to operate the DVD  
menu.  
!
!
To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter] in  
order.  
3
#
Touch the desired menu item.  
Touch  
For time (time search)  
.
!
!
!
To select 5 minutes 3 seconds, touch [5],  
[min], [3], [sec] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [min] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch  
[1], [0], [0], [5], [sec] and [Enter] in order.  
The touch panel keys to select the menu item are  
displayed.  
Using DVD menu by touch  
panel keys  
If items on the DVD menu appear, the touch  
panel keys may overlay them. If so, select an  
item using those touch panel keys.  
p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear].  
To cancel the input numbers, touch and  
hold [Clear].  
Direct number search  
You can use this function when you need to  
enter a numerical command during DVD play-  
back.  
1
2
Touch [Search].  
Touch [10Key].  
100  
En  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DVD-Video  
19  
p To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
1
Touch [a], [b], [c] or [d] to select the  
desired menu item.  
2
Touch [q] or [r] to adjust playback  
speed during slow motion playback.  
Each time you touch [q] or [r] it changes  
the speed in four steps in the following order:  
1/16 f 1/8 f 1/4 f 1/2  
p There is no sound during slow motion play-  
back.  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during slow motion playback.  
p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-  
ble.  
p If the touch panel keys for DVD menu selec-  
tion disappear, touching anywhere on the  
screen, then touching  
again.  
displays them  
2
Touch [Enter].  
Using the “Function” menu  
Playback starts from the selected menu item.  
The way to display the menu differs depending  
on the disc.  
%
Touch  
on the“DVD-V” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
1
2
3
#
Touch [Position].  
Each touch of [Position] changes the display po-  
sition of touch panel keys.  
#
Touch [Hide].  
The touch panel keys are hidden.  
And  
is displayed, so you can select a  
menu item by touching the screen.  
Frame-by-frame playback  
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time  
during pause.  
1 Changes the repeat range  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
!
Disc: Plays throughout the current disc.  
Chapter: Repeats just the current chap-  
ter.  
%
Touch [r] during pause.  
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead  
one frame.  
!
Title: Repeats just the current title.  
p To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during frame-by-frame playback.  
p If you perform chapter (title) search, fast  
forward, fast reverse or slow motion  
playback, the repeat play range changes  
to “Disc”.  
p This function is not available when disc  
playback has been stopped.  
2 Selects audio output  
Slow motion playback  
This lets you slow down playback speed.  
When playing DVDs recorded with LPCM  
audio, you can switch the audio output.  
Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly until the de-  
sired audio output appears on the display.  
1
Touch and hold [r] until  
played during playback.  
The icon is displayed, and forward slow  
motion playback begins.  
is dis-  
101  
En  
 
Chapter  
19  
Playing a DVD-Video  
Each touch of [L/R Select] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
!
!
L+R: Left and right  
L: Left  
R: Right  
Mix: Mixing left and right  
p This function is not available when disc  
playback has been stopped.  
3 DVD setup adjustments  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/  
DivX® Setup menu on page 107.  
102  
En  
Chapter  
Playing a DivX video  
20  
4 Audio channel indicator  
Shows the current audio channel type, such  
as “Mch” (Multi-channel).  
You can play a DivX disc using the built-in  
drive of the navigation system. This section de-  
scribes those operations.  
5 Subtitle number indicator  
Shows the subtitle number currently selected.  
6 Repeat range indicator  
Starting procedure  
Shows which repeat range has been selected.  
= For details, refer to Changes the repeat  
range on page 106.  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
7 Current time  
8 Digital sound format indicator  
Shows the digital sound format (surround  
sound format) currently selected.  
9 Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current file.  
a Source icon  
2
Insert the disc you want to play into  
disc-loading slot.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting a disc on page 14.  
p If the disc is already set, tap [Disc] on the  
left edge of the screen.  
Shows which source has been selected.  
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on  
page 77.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the disc.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on the next page.  
Reading the screen  
12345  
6
7
8
a
9
1 Folder number indicator  
Shows the folder number currently playing.  
2 Audio track indicator  
Shows the audio track number currently se-  
lected.  
3 File number indicator  
Shows the file number currently playing.  
103  
En  
 
Chapter  
20  
Playing a DivX video  
Using the touch panel keys  
Playback screen (page 1)  
a
1
2
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
Playback screen (page 2)  
b
c
d
f
e
p With some discs, the icon 9 may be dis-  
played, meaning that the operation is inva-  
lid.  
Tapping a folder on the list shows its content.  
You can play a file on the list by tapping it.  
1 Selects a file from the list  
Touching the key displays the list which lets  
you see the list of file names or folder names  
on a disc.  
p A dash (–) is displayed if there is no cor-  
responding information.  
= For details, refer to Operating list screens  
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 77.  
The contents of the folder in which the cur-  
rently playing file is located are displayed.  
104  
En  
 
Chapter  
Playing a DivX video  
20  
Touching displays the content of the upper  
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder  
is listed, cannot be used.  
d Changes the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)  
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the  
subtitle languages recorded on the disc.  
e Fast reverse or forward  
2 Stops playback  
3 Hides the touch panel keys and informa-  
tion of the current video  
Touch [m] or [n] to perform fast reverse or  
forward.  
Touching [Hide] shows only the current video.  
To display the touch panel keys and informa-  
tion of the current video, touch the screen.  
4 Skips forward or backward  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of  
the current file. Touching it twice quickly will  
skip to the previous file.  
If you touch and hold [m] or [n] for five  
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues  
even if you release either of these keys. To re-  
sume playback at a desired point, touch  
[f], [m] or [n] opposite to key pushed  
for five seconds.  
f Frame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion  
playback)  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using the TRK button.  
= For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-  
back on this page.  
5 Playback and Pause  
= For details, refer to Slow motion playback  
on this page.  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
6 Switches to the next page of touch panel  
keys  
Frame-by-frame playback  
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time  
during pause.  
7 Switches the information  
Touching [Disp] changes the content of the in-  
formation panel as follows:  
Disc information display — Current folder  
name display — Current file name display  
8 Recalls equalizer curves  
%
Touch [r] during pause.  
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead  
one frame.  
p To return to normal playback, touch [f].  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during frame-by-frame playback.  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 172.  
9 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on the next page.  
a Switches the media file type played  
When playing a disc containing a mixture of  
various media file types, you can switch be-  
tween media file types to play.  
Slow motion playback  
This lets you slow down playback speed.  
%
Touch and hold [r] until  
played during playback.  
The icon is displayed, and forward slow  
is dis-  
Tap the key repeatedly to switch between the  
following media file types:  
motion playback begins.  
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) — ROM (com-  
pressed audio file) — DivX (DivX video files)  
b Searches for a desired scene and starts  
playback from a specified time  
= For details, refer to Starting playback  
from a specified time on the next page.  
c Changes audio tracks (Multi-audio)  
Each touch of [Audio] switches between  
audio tracks.  
p To return to normal playback, touch [n]  
or [m], etc.  
p There is no sound during slow motion play-  
back.  
p With some discs, images may be unclear  
during slow motion playback.  
p Reversed slow motion playback is not possi-  
ble.  
105  
En  
 
Chapter  
20  
Playing a DivX video  
!
!
!
Disc: Plays throughout the current disc.  
File: Repeats just the current file.  
Folder: Repeats just the current folder.  
Starting playback from a  
specified time  
You can search for a desired scene by specify-  
ing the time.  
p Time search are not possible when disc  
playback has been stopped.  
p If you select another folder during repeat  
play, the repeat play range changes to  
“Disc”.  
p If you perform fast reverse or fast for-  
ward during “File”, the repeat play range  
changes to “Folder”.  
1
Touch [Search].  
p When “Folder” is selected, it is not pos-  
sible to playback a subfolder of that  
folder.  
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-  
ber or time and then touch [Enter].  
p When playing discs with compressed  
audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-  
peat play is performed within DivX vi-  
deos even if “Disc” is selected.  
2 DVD setup adjustments  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/  
DivX® Setup menu on the next  
page.  
!
!
!
To select 5 minutes 3 seconds, touch [5],  
[min], [3], [sec] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [min] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch  
[1], [0], [0], [5], [sec] and [Enter] in order.  
p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear].  
To cancel the input numbers, touch and  
hold [Clear].  
Using the “Function” menu  
%
Touch on the “DivX” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
1
2
1 Changes the repeat range  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
106  
En  
 
Chapter  
DVD-Video or DivX setup  
21  
This chapter describes how to configure the  
DVD-Video/DivX player.  
2
Touch [Subtitle Language], [Audio Lan-  
guage] or [Menu Language].  
Each language menu is displayed and the cur-  
rently set language is selected.  
Displaying DVD/DivX® Setup  
3
Touch the desired language.  
menu  
When you select “Others”, a language code  
input display is shown. Input the four-digit  
code of the desired language then touch  
[Enter].  
1
Play the disc that contains DVD-Video  
or DivX.  
= For details, refer to Language code chart for  
DVDs on page 110.  
p If the selected language is not recorded on  
the disc, the default language specified on  
the disc is output and displayed.  
p You can also switch the subtitle and audio  
language by touching [S.Title] or [Audio]  
during playback.  
p Even if you use “S.Title” or “Audio” to  
switch the subtitle or audio language, this  
does not affect the settings here.  
2
3
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
Touch  
.
The “Function” menu appears.  
4
Touch [DVD/DivX® Setup].  
The “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen appears.  
5
Touch the desired function.  
Setting the angle icon display  
You can set the angle icon  
to display in  
scenes where the angle can be switched.  
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
Setup menu on this page.  
2
Touch [Multi Angle].  
Setting the top-priority  
languages  
Touching [Multi Angle] switches between  
“On” and “Off”.  
You can assign the top-priority language to the  
top-priority subtitle, audio and menu in initial  
playback. If the selected language is recorded  
on the disc, subtitles, audio and menu are dis-  
played or output in that language.  
Setting the aspect ratio  
There are two kinds of displays. A wide screen  
display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect)  
of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect  
of 4:3. If you use a regular rear display with a  
TV aspect of 4:3, you can set the aspect ratio  
suitable for your rear display. (We recommend  
use of this function only when you want to fit it  
to the rear display.)  
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
Setup menu on this page.  
107  
En  
 
Chapter  
21  
DVD-Video or DivX setup  
p When using a regular display, select either  
“Letter Box” or “Panscan”. Selecting  
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
Setup menu on the previous page.  
“16:9” may result in an unnatural picture.  
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
Setup menu on the previous page.  
2
3
Touch [Parental Level].  
Touch [0] to [9] to input a four-digit  
code number.  
2
Touch [TV Aspect].  
4
While the input number is displayed,  
Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the setting  
as follows:  
touch [Enter].  
The code number is registered, and you can  
now set the level.  
!
16:9: Wide screen picture (16:9) is displayed  
as it is (initial setting).  
!
Letter Box: The picture is in the shape of a  
letter box with black bands at the top and  
bottom of the screen.  
Panscan: The picture is cut short at the  
right and left of the screen.  
5
Touch any of [1] to [8] to select the de-  
sired level.  
The parental lock level is set.  
!
!
!
Level 8: Playback of the entire disc is possi-  
ble (initial setting).  
p When playing discs that do not have a pan-  
scan system, the disc is played back with  
“Letter Box” even if you select “Panscan”  
setting. Confirm whether the disc package  
Level 7 to Level 2: Playback of discs for  
children and non-adult oriented discs is  
possible.  
Level 1: Only playback of discs for children  
is possible.  
!
bears the  
mark.  
p Some discs do not enable changing of the  
TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc’s in-  
structions.  
p If you want to change the parental level al-  
ready set, enter the registered code number  
and then select the parental level.  
p We recommend that you keep a record of  
your code number in case you forget it.  
p The parental lock level is recorded on the  
disc. You can confirm it by looking at the  
disc package, the included literature or the  
disc itself. You cannot use parental lock  
with discs that do not feature a recorded  
parental lock level.  
Setting the parental lock  
Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental  
lock to set restrictions so that children cannot  
watch violent or adult-oriented scenes. You  
can set the parental lock level in steps as de-  
sired.  
p With some discs, parental lock operates to  
skip certain scenes only, after which normal  
playback resumes. For details, refer to the  
disc’s instructions.  
p When you set a parental lock level and then  
play a disc featuring parental lock, code  
number input indications may be dis-  
played. In this case, playback will begin  
when the correct code number is input.  
p If you forget the registered code number,  
touch  
10 times on the number input  
screen. The registered code number is can-  
celed, letting you register a new one.  
Setting the code number and level  
When you first use this function, register your  
code number. If you do not register a code  
number, parental lock will not operate.  
108  
En  
 
Chapter  
DVD-Video or DivX setup  
Setting the auto play  
When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted,  
this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati-  
cally and start playback from the first chapter  
of the first title.  
21  
p The DivX subtitles will be displayed even  
when the subtitle file setting is on if no cor-  
responding subtitle files exist.  
p Up to three lines can be displayed at  
once.  
p This function is available for DVD-Video.  
p Some DVDs may not operate properly. If  
this function is not fully operable, turn this  
function off and start playback.  
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
Setup menu on page 107.  
2
Touch [Auto Play].  
Touching [Auto Play] switches this setting be-  
tween “On” and “Off”.  
p When “Auto Play” is set to “On”, the repeat  
range is automatically set to “Disc”.  
Setting the subtitle file for  
DivX  
You can select whether to display DivX exter-  
nal subtitles or not.  
p If no DivX external subtitle files exist, the  
original DivX subtitles are displayed even  
when “Custom” is selected.  
1
Display the “DVD/DivX® Setup” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying DVD/DivX®  
Setup menu on page 107.  
2
Touch [Subtitle File].  
Touching [Subtitle File] switches this setting  
between “Original” and “Custom”.  
p Up to 42 characters can be displayed on  
one line. If more than 42 characters are set,  
the line breaks and the characters are dis-  
played on the next line.  
p Up to 126 characters can be displayed on  
one screen. If more than 126 characters are  
set, the excess characters will not be dis-  
played.  
109  
En  
 
Chapter  
21  
DVD-Video or DivX setup  
Language code chart for DVDs  
Two-letter  
code,  
Two-letter  
code,  
Two-letter  
code,  
Language  
Language  
Language  
input code  
aa, 0101  
ab, 0102  
af, 0106  
am, 0113  
ar, 0118  
as, 0119  
ay, 0125  
az, 0126  
ba, 0201  
be, 0205  
bg, 0207  
bh, 0208  
bi, 0209  
bn, 0214  
bo, 0215  
br, 0218  
ca, 0301  
co, 0315  
cs, 0319  
cy, 0325  
da, 0401  
de, 0405  
dz, 0426  
ee, 0505  
el, 0512  
en, 0514  
eo, 0515  
es, 0519  
et, 0520  
eu, 0521  
fa, 0601  
fi, 0609  
input code  
ia, 0901  
ie, 0905  
ik, 0911  
in, 0914  
is, 0919  
it, 0920  
input code  
rn, 1814  
ro, 1815  
ru, 1821  
rw, 1823  
sa, 1901  
sd, 1904  
sg, 1907  
sh, 1908  
si, 1909  
sk, 1911  
sl, 1912  
sm, 1913  
sn, 1914  
so, 1915  
sq, 1917  
sr, 1918  
ss, 1919  
st, 1920  
su, 1921  
sv, 1922  
sw, 1923  
ta, 2001  
te, 2005  
tg, 2007  
th, 2008  
ti, 2009  
Afar  
Interlingua  
Interlingue  
Inupiaq  
Indonesian  
Icelandic  
Italian  
Japanese  
Yiddish  
Javanese  
Georgian  
Kazakh  
Kalaallisut  
Central Khmer  
Kannada  
Korean  
Kashmiri  
Kurdish  
Kirghiz; Kyrgyz  
Latin  
Lingala  
Lao  
Lithuanian  
Latvian  
Malagasy  
Maori  
Macedonian  
Malayalam  
Mongolian  
Moldavian  
Marathi  
Rundi  
Abkhazian  
Afrikaans  
Amharic  
Arabic  
Assamese  
Aymara  
Azerbaijani  
Bashkir  
Belarusian  
Bulgarian  
Bihari  
Bislama  
Bengali  
Tibetan  
Breton  
Catalan  
Corsican  
Czech  
Romanian  
Russian  
Kinyarwanda  
Sanskrit  
Sindhi  
ja, 1001  
ji, 1009  
Sango  
Serbo-Croatian  
Sinhala  
Slovak  
Slovenian  
Samoan  
Shona  
Somali  
Albanian  
Serbian  
Swati  
Sotho, Southern  
Sundanese  
Swedish  
Swahili  
Tamil  
jw, 1023  
ka, 1101  
kk, 1111  
kl, 1112  
km, 1113  
kn, 1114  
ko, 1115  
ks, 1119  
ku, 1121  
ky, 1125  
la, 1201  
ln, 1214  
lo, 1215  
lt, 1220  
Welsh  
Danish  
German  
Dzongkha  
Ewe  
lv, 1222  
Telugu  
Tajik  
Thai  
mg, 1307  
mi, 1309  
mk, 1311  
ml, 1312  
mn, 1314  
mo, 1315  
mr, 1318  
ms, 1319  
mt, 1320  
my, 1325  
na, 1401  
ne, 1405  
nl, 1412  
no, 1415  
oc, 1503  
om, 1513  
or, 1518  
pa, 1601  
pl, 1612  
ps, 1619  
pt, 1620  
qu, 1721  
rm, 1813  
Greek  
English  
Esperanto  
Spanish  
Estonian  
Basque  
Persian  
Finnish  
Fijian  
Faroese  
French  
Western Frisian  
Irish  
Tigrinya  
Turkmen  
Tagalog  
Tswana  
Tonga  
Turkish  
Tsonga  
Tatar  
tk, 2011  
tl, 2012  
tn, 2014  
to, 2015  
tr, 2018  
Malay  
Maltese  
Burmese  
Nauru  
Nepali  
Dutch; Flemish  
Norwegian  
Occitan  
Oromo  
Oriya  
ts, 2019  
tt, 2020  
fj, 0610  
fo, 0615  
fr, 0618  
tw, 2023  
uk, 2111  
ur, 2118  
uz, 2126  
vi, 2209  
vo, 2215  
wo, 2315  
Twi  
Ukrainian  
Urdu  
fy, 0625  
ga, 0701  
gd, 0704  
gl, 0712  
gn, 0714  
gu, 0721  
ha, 0801  
hi, 0809  
hr, 0818  
hu, 0821  
hy, 0825  
Uzbek  
Gaelic  
Vietnamese  
Volapuk  
Wolof  
Xhosa  
Yoruba  
Galician  
Guarani  
Gujarati  
Hausa  
Panjabi; Punjabi xh, 2408  
Polish  
yo, 2515  
zh, 2608  
zu, 2621  
Hindi  
Pushto; Pashto  
Portuguese  
Quechua  
Chinese  
Zulu  
Croatian  
Hungarian  
Armenian  
Romansh  
110  
En  
 
Chapter  
Playing music files (from USB or SD)  
22  
You can play the compressed audio files  
stored in the external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
Reading the screen  
1
2
p In the following description, the SD mem-  
ory card and USB memory device are col-  
lectively referred to as the “external storage  
device (USB, SD)”. If it indicates the USB  
memory device only, it is referred to as the  
“USB storage device”.  
3
4
5
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-  
mance with some external storage devices.  
p You can playback the files on a USB sto-  
rage device compliant with Mass Storage  
Class. For details about the USB Class,  
refer to the manual supplied with the USB  
storage device.  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
2
Insert the SD memory card into the SD  
card slot or plug the USB storage device  
into the USB connector.  
= For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-  
rage device on page 18.  
1 Playback condition indicator  
Indicates the current playback condition.  
!
Scanning folders and files  
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an  
SD memory card on page 15.  
Indicator:  
Meaning  
Cancels the scan play.  
p Playback is performed in order of folder  
numbers. Folders are skipped if they con-  
tain no playable files. If there are no play-  
able files in folder 01 (root folder), playback  
starts from folder 02.  
Plays the first audio files of  
each folder for about 10 sec-  
onds when the repeat range  
is set to “Media”.  
Plays the beginning of each  
audio file in the current folder  
for about 10 seconds when  
the repeat range is set to  
“Folder”.  
3
Tap [USB] or [SD] on the left edge of  
the screen to display the “USB” or “SD”  
screen.  
!
!
Playing files in random order  
4
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the external storage device  
(USB, SD).  
Indicator:  
Meaning  
Does not play files in random  
order.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys (Music) on page 113.  
Plays all audio files in the cur-  
rent repeat play range in ran-  
dom order.  
Setting a repeat play range  
111  
En  
 
Chapter  
22  
Playing music files (from USB or SD)  
Indicator:  
Meaning  
Repeats all compressed  
audio files in the selected ex-  
ternal storage device (USB,  
SD).  
Repeats just the current file.  
Repeats the current folder.  
2 Current file information  
!
!
!
!
: Folder name  
Shows the folder name currently play-  
ing.  
: Artist name  
Shows the artist name currently playing  
(when available).  
: Album title  
Shows the title of the album for the cur-  
rent file (when available).  
: Track title  
Shows the title of the track currently  
playing (when available).  
p If the title of a track is not available,  
the file name appears.  
Play time  
!
Shows the elapsed playing time within  
the current file.  
p “-------” is displayed if there is no corre-  
sponding information.  
3 Current time  
4 File information  
!
!
!
File number indicator  
File name indicator  
File type indicator  
Shows the type of audio file.  
5 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
112  
En  
Chapter  
Playing music files (from USB or SD)  
22  
Using the touch panel keys (Music)  
1
2
3
9
8
4
7
6
5
1 Scans folders and files  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on the next page.  
7 Playback and Pause  
Scan play is performed by touching only one  
key.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Scans folders and files on the next  
page.  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
8 Selects a file from the list  
2 Plays files in random order  
The files in the current repeat play range can  
be played at random by touching only one key.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Plays files in random order on the  
next page.  
Touching the key displays the list which lets  
you see the list of track titles or folder names  
on an external storage device (USB, SD).  
Tapping a folder on the list shows its content.  
You can play a file on the list by tapping it.  
3 Sets a repeat play range  
The repeat play range can be changed by  
touching only one key.  
= For details, refer to Changes the repeat  
range on the next page.  
4 Selects a file to play  
Scrolling the keys up or down displays files,  
and tapping a file starts playback.  
Tapping the lower key during random play-  
back skips to the next file. Tapping the upper  
key jumps to the start of the current file.  
5 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Operating list screens  
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 77.  
Touching displays the content of the upper  
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder  
is listed, cannot be used.  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 172.  
9 Switches the operation screen  
6 Displays the “Function” menu  
113  
En  
 
Chapter  
22  
Playing music files (from USB or SD)  
Tapping this key switches between the screen  
to operate music files and the screen to oper-  
ate video files. This touch panel key is avail-  
able only when there are both audio and video  
files in the external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
Each touch of [Scan] turns it on or off.  
When you find the track you want, touch  
[Scan] to turn the scan play off.  
p After all files or folders scanning are fin-  
ished, normal playback will begin again.  
p If you turn the scan play on when the re-  
peat play range is set to “Track”, the re-  
peat play range changes to “Folder”  
automatically.  
Using the “Function” menu  
%
Touch on the “USB” or “SD” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
1
2
3
1 Changes the repeat range  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
Media: Repeats all compressed audio  
files in the selected external storage de-  
vice (USB, SD).  
!
!
Track: Repeats just the current file.  
Folder: Repeats the current folder.  
p If you skip the file forward or backward  
when the repeat play range in “Track”,  
the repeat play range changes to  
“Folder”.  
2 Plays files in random order  
Random play lets you playback files in ran-  
dom order within the current repeat range.  
Each touch of [Random] turns it on or off.  
p If you turn the random play on when the  
repeat play range is set to “Track”, the  
repeat play range changes to “Folder”  
automatically.  
3 Scans folders and files  
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds  
of each file. Scan play is performed in the  
current repeat play range.  
114  
En  
 
Chapter  
Playing video files (from USB or SD)  
23  
You can play the video files stored in the exter-  
nal storage device (USB, SD).  
Reading the screen  
1 2 3  
4
5
p In the following description, the SD mem-  
ory card and USB memory device are col-  
lectively referred to as the “external storage  
device (USB, SD)”. If it indicates the USB  
memory device only, it is referred to as the  
“USB storage device”.  
6
8
Starting procedure  
7
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
p This unit may not achieve optimum perfor-  
mance with some external storage devices.  
p You can playback the files on a USB sto-  
rage device compliant with Mass Storage  
Class. For details about the USB Class,  
refer to the manual supplied with the USB  
storage device.  
2
Insert the SD memory card into the SD  
card slot or plug the USB storage device  
into the USB connector.  
= For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-  
rage device on page 18.  
= For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an  
SD memory card on page 15.  
p Playback is performed in order of folder  
numbers. Folders are skipped if they con-  
tain no playable files. If there are no play-  
able files in folder 01 (root folder), playback  
starts from folder 02.  
1 Folder number indicator  
2 File number indicator  
3 Current folder name indicator  
Shows the folder name currently playing.  
4 File name indicator  
Shows the file name currently playing.  
5 Current time  
6 File type indicator  
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.  
7 Play time indicator  
3
Tap [USB] or [SD] on the left edge of  
the screen to display the “USB” or “SD”  
screen.  
Shows the elapsed playing time within the  
current file.  
8 Source icon  
4
Touch the screen to display the touch  
Shows which source has been selected.  
panel keys.  
5
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the external storage device  
(USB, SD).  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys (Video) on the next page.  
115  
En  
 
Chapter  
23  
Playing video files (from USB or SD)  
Using the touch panel keys (Video)  
9
1
2
3
8
7
6
5
4
1 Stops playback  
2 Selects a file from the list  
p There is no sound on fast reverse or for-  
ward.  
You can select and play the title you want from  
the list.  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using the TRK button.  
4 Hides the touch panel keys and informa-  
tion of the current video  
Touching [Hide] shows only the current video.  
To display the touch panel keys and informa-  
tion of the current video, touch the screen.  
5 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
6 Searches for a desired scene and starts  
playback from a specified time  
= For details, refer to Searching for a speci-  
fic scene and starting playback from a  
specified time on the next page.  
7 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Operating list screens  
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 77.  
The contents of the folder in which the cur-  
rently playing file is located are displayed.  
Touching displays the content of the upper  
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder  
is listed, cannot be used.  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 172.  
3 Skips forward or backward  
8 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on the next page.  
9 Switches the operation screen  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of  
the current file. Touching it twice quickly will  
skip to the previous file.  
Fast reverse or forward  
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast reverse  
or fast forward.  
116  
En  
 
Chapter  
Playing video files (from USB or SD)  
23  
Tapping this key switches between the screen  
to operate music files and the screen to oper-  
ate video files. This touch panel key is avail-  
able only when there are both audio and video  
files in the external storage device (USB, SD).  
3
Touch  
.
The “Function” menu appears.  
p If the touch panel keys are not shown,  
touch anywhere on the screen to display  
them.  
1
2
Searching for a specific scene  
and starting playback from a  
specified time  
You can search for a desired scene by specify-  
ing the time.  
1
Touch [Search].  
1 Changes the repeat range  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
2
Touch the keys to input the target num-  
ber or time and then touch [Enter].  
!
Media: Repeats all video files in the se-  
lected external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
!
!
File: Repeats just the current file.  
Folder: Repeats the current folder.  
p If you skip the file forward or backward  
when the repeat play range in “File”, the  
repeat play range changes to “Folder”.  
2 Changes the screen size of video  
If a video file is played, you can select the  
display mode between normal and full  
screen.  
!
!
!
To select 5 minutes 3 seconds, touch [5],  
[min], [3], [sec] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],  
[1], [min] and [Enter] in order.  
To select 100 minutes 05 seconds, touch  
[1], [0], [0], [5], [sec] and [Enter] in order.  
Each touch of [Video Output Setting]  
changes the setting as follows:  
p To cancel an input number, touch [Clear].  
To cancel the input numbers, touch and  
hold [Clear].  
!
Normal: Enlarges the display size while  
maintaining the aspect ratio.  
Full: Displays the image full-screen  
although the aspect ratio may be af-  
fected.  
!
Using the “Function” menu  
1
Tap [USB] or [SD] on the left edge of  
the screen to display the “USB” or “SD”  
screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
2
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
117  
En  
 
Chapter  
24  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-  
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-  
tion system.  
Video  
1
3
4
p A USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU50V)  
(sold separately) is required for connection.  
7
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
3
1 Playback condition indicator  
Indicates the current playback condition.  
! Setting the shuffle play for music  
2
Connect your iPod.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start.  
Indicator:  
Meaning  
= For details, refer to Connecting your iPod on  
page 19.  
Cancels the shuffle play.  
p If the iPod is already connected, tap [iPod]  
on the left edge of the screen.  
= For details, refer to Selecting a source on  
page 77.  
p No video is output if iPod is selected as AV  
source, check the setting in “AV1 Input” on  
the “AV System Settings” menu.  
= For details, refer to Setting video input 1  
(AV1) on page 168.  
Plays back songs in random  
order within the selected list.  
Selects an album randomly,  
and then plays back all songs  
in that album in order.  
!
Setting a repeat play range  
Indicator:  
Meaning  
Repeats all songs in the se-  
lected list.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control your iPod.  
Repeats just the current  
song.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Using  
the touch panel keys on page 120.  
2 Current song (episode) information  
!
!
!
!
: Artist name (podcast title)  
Shows the artist name currently playing.  
When a podcast is played, the podcast  
title is displayed.  
: Album title (release date)  
Shows the title of the album for the  
song. When a podcast is played, the re-  
lease date is displayed.  
Reading the screen  
Music  
1
2
4
5
7
: Song title (episode)  
Shows the title of the current song.  
When a podcast is played, the episode  
is displayed.  
: Chapter number  
6
118  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
24  
Shows the current chapter number and  
total number of chapters when the file  
with chapters played.  
!
Play time  
Shows the elapsed playing time within  
the current song (episode).  
p “-------” is displayed if there is no corre-  
sponding information.  
3 Current video information  
!
: Chapter number  
Shows the current chapter number  
when the video with chapters played.  
: Artist name (podcast title)  
Shows the artist name currently playing.  
When a podcast is played, the podcast  
title is displayed.  
!
!
: File number indicator  
Shows the number of the file currently  
playing.  
!
!
File name indicator  
Shows the file name currently playing.  
Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time within  
the current file.  
4 Current time  
5 Song (episode) information  
!
Song number indicator  
Shows the number of the song and the  
total number of songs in the selected  
list.  
!
!
Song title (episode) indicator  
Album artwork  
Album art of the current song is dis-  
played if it is available.  
6 Genre indicator  
Shows the genre of the current song.  
7 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
p If characters recorded on the iPod are not  
compatible with this navigation system,  
they may turn into garbled characters.  
119  
En  
Chapter  
24  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
Using the touch panel keys  
Music  
1
2
3
d
c
b
a
4
9
8
7
6
5
Video  
d
e
8
7
g
9
f
1 Sets the shuffle play for music  
= For details, refer to Sets repeat play on  
page 124.  
The shuffle play setting can be changed by  
touching only one key.  
= For details, refer to Sets the shuffle  
play for music on page 124.  
2 Sets a repeat play range  
3 Plays a playlist using MusicSphere  
Touching the key displays the MusicSphere  
screen, and a playlist created with the PC ap-  
plication (MusicSphere) can be played.  
= For details, refer to Playing Music-  
Sphere on page 124.  
The repeat play range can be changed by  
touching only one key.  
120  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
24  
4 Selects a song to play  
p Touching [Video] or [Music] on the list  
screens enables you to perform the  
equivalent operation.  
Scrolling the keys up or down displays songs,  
and tapping a song starts playback.  
Tapping the lower key during shuffle playback  
skips to the next song. Tapping the upper key  
once skip to the start of the current song. Tap-  
ping it again will skip to the previous song.  
When the song with chapters played, chapter  
can be skipped back and forward.  
5 Displays the genre list  
6 Displays the top category menu  
Touching the key displays the top category for  
song playback.  
Displays the top category menu  
Touching the key displays the top category  
menu for song or video playback.  
Displays the previous selected list  
If you select the song from the list to play after  
touching , touching the key displays the pre-  
vious list.  
e Skips back or forward to another video  
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next  
video. Touching [o] once skips to the start  
of the current video. Touching again will skip  
to the previous video. When the video with  
chapters played, chapter can be skipped back  
and forward.  
7 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 172.  
8 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on page 124.  
9 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
a Displays the song list  
Fast reverse or forward  
Touch and hold [o] or [p] to fast reverse  
or fast forward.  
If you touch and hold [o] or [p] for five  
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues  
even if you release either of these keys. To re-  
sume playback at a desired point, touch  
[f], [o] or [p].  
b Displays the album list  
c Displays the artist list  
d Switches the operation screen  
Tapping this key displays the touch panel key  
([Video] or [Music]) to switch between the  
screen to operate video files and the screen to  
operate music files.  
p You can also perform these operations  
by using the TRK button.  
f Hides the touch panel keys and informa-  
tion of the current video  
Touching [Hide] shows only the current video.  
To display the touch panel keys and informa-  
tion of the current video, touch the screen.  
g Displays the top category menu for video  
Touching the key displays the top category for  
video playback.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Starting the video playback on the next  
page.  
p This touch panel key is available only  
when there are both audio and video file  
in your iPod.  
p If iPod fifth generation is connected, the  
following settings are automatically  
changed when the operation screen is  
switched to the screen to operate video  
files.  
Displays the previous selected list  
If you select the video from the list to play  
after touching , touching the key displays  
the previous list.  
!
!
“Repeat” is set to “All”.  
“Shuffle” is set to “Off”.  
121  
En  
 
Chapter  
24  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
Starting the video playback  
This navigation system can play video if an  
iPod with video capabilities is connected.  
Narrowing down a song or  
video with the list  
Tapping an item on list allows you to search  
for a song or video and play it in your iPod.  
1
Touch [iPod] on the left edge of the  
screen to display the touch panel key to  
switch to a video source.  
1
Display a list screen.  
= For details, refer to Displays the genre list  
on the previous page.  
= For details, refer to Displays the song list  
on the previous page.  
2
Tap [Music].  
= For details, refer to Displays the album  
list on the previous page.  
= For details, refer to Displays the artist list  
on the previous page.  
#
Touch to display the top category menu  
screen, and then tap the category you want.  
A list of videos by category appears.  
Tap one of the categories in that con-  
3
tains the video you want to play.  
2
Scroll by dragging tabs up or down to  
display the character that you want to re-  
fine.  
4
Tap your desired item on the list to nar-  
row down them until the video list ap-  
pears.  
= For details, refer to Narrowing down a song  
or video with the list on this page.  
5
On the video list, tap the video you  
want to play.  
Alphabet tabs  
Video playback will start.  
3
Tap the tab to select the character and  
6
Touch the screen to display the touch  
display the page which includes applicable  
options.  
panel keys.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Using  
the touch panel keys on page 120.  
p An article listed below and space at the be-  
ginning of the artist name will be ignored  
and the next character will be taken into ac-  
count for searching.  
— “A” or “a”  
122  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
24  
— “AN”, “An”, or “an”  
— “THE”, “The”, or “the”  
4
Scroll by dragging items up or down,  
and display the item you want to select.  
Refine the item until the song title (episode) is  
displayed on the list.  
p Tapping [All] on the list includes all options  
in the current list. For example, if you tap  
[All] after tapping [Artists], you can pro-  
ceed to the next screen with all artists in  
the list selected.  
p After you select Artists, Albums, or  
Genres, go on to tap one of the list to start  
playing the first song in the selected list  
and display the next hierarchy.  
5
On the song (episode) or video list, tap  
the song (episode) or video you want to  
play.  
p After you select the song (episode) or video  
using this function, touching  
the list previously selected.  
displays  
Operating the functions  
from your iPod  
You can control the functions by using iPod it-  
self while iPod is connected to the navigation  
system. Sound can be heard from the car’s  
speakers, and operation can be conducted  
from your iPod.  
Even if “Change Control Mode” is set to  
“iPod”, following functions are available from  
this navigation system.  
!
!
!
!
Playback and Pause  
Fast reverse or forward  
Skip forward or backward  
Adjusting the volume  
= For details, refer to Sets iPod control  
mode on page 125.  
123  
En  
 
Chapter  
24  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
Tapping a key moves the playlist to the center  
of the screen, and tapping the center key  
starts playback.  
p To change the playlist to be displayed,  
rotate the sphere by dragging the keys  
up, down, left, or right.  
Playing MusicSphere  
You can play playlists created with the PC ap-  
plication (MusicSphere) using an exciting gra-  
phic interface.  
p PC application (MusicSphere) will be avail-  
able on our website.  
2 Switches to the AV operation screen  
Reading the screen  
Using the “Function” menu  
1
2
p If “Change Control Mode” is set to “iPod”,  
only the setting of “Change Control  
Mode” is available.  
5
4
1
3
%
Touch on the “iPod” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
1 2 3  
4
1 Playlist name indicator  
Shows the name of the playlist currently se-  
lected.  
2 Current time  
3 Category name  
Shows the category name in the playlist.  
4 Song title indicator  
6
1 Sets repeat play  
5
Shows six songs including the first song  
played after selecting the playlist.  
5 Category name and total number of songs  
Shows the category name and the total num-  
ber of playable songs in the playlist currently  
selected.  
There are two repeat play types for play-  
back.  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
All: Repeats all songs in the selected  
list.  
Using the touch panel keys  
!
One: Repeats just the current song.  
2 Sets the shuffle play for music  
This function shuffles songs or albums and  
plays them in random order.  
1
Each touch of [Shuffle] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
!
Off: Does not shuffle.  
Songs: Plays back songs in random  
order within the selected list.  
Albums: Selects an album randomly,  
and then plays back all songs in that  
album in order.  
2
!
1 Plays the playlist  
124  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using an iPod (iPod)  
24  
3 Sets the audiobook play speed  
While listening to an audiobook on iPod,  
playback speed can be changed.  
Each touch of [Audio Book] changes the  
setting as follows:  
!
!
Normal: Playback in normal speed  
Faster: Playback faster than normal  
speed  
!
Slower: Playback slower than normal  
speed  
4 Plays video in wide screen mode  
If the video is compatible with wide screen  
format, set “Widescreen” to “On” in order  
to view the video image in the wide screen.  
Each touch of [Widescreen] changes the  
setting as follows:  
!
On: Outputs the wide-screen video from  
iPod.  
!
Off: Outputs the normal-sized video  
from iPod.  
p Display size is changed after you  
change “Widescreen” setting and select  
the video to play.  
p This setting is available only during the  
video operation.  
5 Plays songs related to the currently  
playing song  
You can play songs related to the currently  
playing song, using of the following lists.  
!
Link Artists: Songs related to the cur-  
rently playing artist will be played in the  
album order.  
!
!
Link Albums: Songs related to the cur-  
rently playing album will be played.  
Link Genre: Songs related to the cur-  
rently playing genre will be played in the  
artist order.  
6 Sets iPod control mode  
While the control mode is set to “iPod”, you  
can operate iPod function from the con-  
nected iPod.  
Each touch of [Change Control Mode]  
changes the setting as follows:  
!
Navi: Allows you to control the iPod  
functions from the navigation system.  
iPod: Allows you to control the iPod  
functions from the connected iPod.  
!
125  
En  
 
Chapter  
®
25  
Using Pandora  
IMPORTANT:  
stations, buying songs from iTunes, viewing  
additional text information, logging in to Pan-  
dora, and adjusting Cell Network Audio Qual-  
ity.  
Requirements to access the Pandora music ser-  
vice using the Pioneer navigation system:  
!
Apple iPhone (first generation), iPhone 3G, or  
iPhone 3GS, with firmware version 3.0 or later.  
Latest version of the Pandora application for  
the iPhone, downloaded to your device.  
(Search Apple iTunes App Store for “Pan-  
dora”).  
Pandora Internet radio is a music service not af-  
filiated with Pioneer. More information is avail-  
able at http://www.pandora.com.  
Pandora is a registered trademark of Pandora  
Media, Inc.  
!
!
!
Current Pandora account (Free account and  
paid accounts available from Pandora; create  
a free account online at  
http://www.pandora.com/register or through  
the Pandora application for the iPhone).  
iPhone Data Plan.  
Note: if the Data Plan for your iPhone does  
not provide for unlimited data usage, addi-  
tional charges from AT&T may apply for acces-  
sing the Pandora service via AT&T’s 3G and/or  
EDGE networks.  
You can play the Pandora by connecting your  
iPod which was installed the Pandora applica-  
tion.  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
!
!
Connection to the Internet via 3G, EDGE or  
WiFi network.  
Optional Pioneer adapter cable connecting  
your iPhone to the Pioneer navigation system.  
2
Connect your iPod.  
The source changes and then playback will  
start.  
= For details, refer to Connecting your iPod on  
page 19.  
Limitations:  
!
p If the iPod is already connected, tap [Pan-  
dora] on the left edge of the screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
p When an iPod is connected to the naviga-  
tion system while the Pandora application  
is running, the “Pandora” screen appears  
after the “iPod” screen. Music may also be  
played back in the “iPod” screen.  
Access to the Pandora service will depend on  
the availability of a cellular and/or WiFi net-  
work for purposes of allowing your iPhone to  
connect to the Internet.  
Pandora’s service is currently only available in  
the U.S.  
!
!
Ability of the Pioneer navigation system to ac-  
cess the Pandora service is subject to change  
without notice and could be affected by any of  
the following: compatibility issues with future  
firmware versions of iPhones; compatibility is-  
sues with future firmware versions of the Pan-  
dora application for the iPhone; changes to  
the Pandora music service by Pandora; dis-  
continuation of the Pandora music service by  
Pandora.  
Certain functionality of the Pandora service is  
not available when accessing the service  
through the Pioneer navigation system, in-  
cluding, but not limited to, creating new sta-  
tions, deleting stations, emailing current  
3
Start up the Pandora application in-  
stalled on the iPod.  
4
Tap [Pandora] on the left end of the  
screen to display “Pandora” screen.  
5
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the Pandora.  
!
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on page 128.  
126  
En  
 
Chapter  
®
Using Pandora  
25  
Reading the screen  
1
2
3
4
1 Current song information  
!
Station name indicator  
Shows the Pandora station name the  
tuner is currently tuned in.  
: Artist name  
Shows the artist name currently playing.  
: Album title  
!
!
Shows the title of the album for the cur-  
rent song.  
!
!
: Song title  
Shows the title of the current song.  
Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time within  
the current song.  
p “-------” is displayed if there is no corre-  
sponding information.  
2 Current time  
3 Album artwork  
Album art of the current song is displayed if it  
is available.  
4 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
127  
En  
 
Chapter  
®
25  
Using Pandora  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
6
5
4
3
2
1 Selects a Pandora station from the list  
Touching the key displays the list of your Pan-  
dora stations to select one of them to play.  
!
:
You can sort the items in the list in  
order of dates the items were cre-  
ated.  
2 Thumbs Up  
Touching the key gives “Thumbs Up” to the  
song currently playing.  
3 Thumbs Down  
Touching the key gives “Thumbs Down” to the  
song currently playing and skip to the next  
song.  
4 Bookmark  
= For details, refer to Operating list screens  
(e.g. iPod list screen) on page 77.  
Scroll by dragging items up or down, and dis-  
play the item you want to select.  
p Touching [QuickMix] plays only one  
song at a time from shuffled several sta-  
tions.  
Touching the key displays the screen which  
lets you select the artist or song to add book-  
marks.  
5 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 172.  
6 Playback and Pause  
Touching [f] switches between playback  
and pause.  
p Each time you touch [List] changes the  
sort order.  
Current order is indicated on the upper  
right of the screen.  
!
:
You can sort the items in the list al-  
phabetically.  
128  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using the Bluetooth audio player  
26  
You can control the Bluetooth audio player  
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology.  
p Before using the Bluetooth audio player,  
you need to register and connect the device  
to this navigation system.  
Bluetooth audio player connected to this  
unit is paused.  
Starting procedure  
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
= For details, refer to Registering your Blue-  
tooth devices on page 63.  
1
p Depending on the Bluetooth audio player  
connected to this navigation system, the  
available operations with this navigation  
system are limited to the following two le-  
vels:  
2
Tap [Audio] on the left edge of the  
screen to display the “Audio” screen.  
— A2DP profile (Advanced Audio Distribu-  
tion Profile): Only playing back songs on  
your audio player is possible.  
— A2DP profile and AVRCP profile (Audio/  
Video Remote Control Profile): Playing  
back, pausing, selecting songs, etc., are  
possible.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the Bluetooth audio player.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on page 131.  
Reading the screen  
p Since there are a number of Bluetooth  
audio players available on the market, op-  
erations with your Bluetooth audio player  
using this navigation system vary greatly in  
range. Please refer to the instruction man-  
ual that came with your Bluetooth audio  
player as well as this manual while operat-  
ing your player on this navigation system.  
p While you are listening to songs on your  
Bluetooth audio player, please refrain from  
operating your cellular phone as much as  
possible. If you try operating on your cellu-  
lar phone, the signal from your cellular  
phone may cause a noise on the song play-  
back.  
p Even if you switch to another source while  
listening to a song on your Bluetooth audio  
player, the playback of song continues to  
elapse.  
p Depending on the Bluetooth audio player  
you connected to this navigation system,  
operations on this navigation system to  
control the player may differ from those ex-  
plained in this manual.  
1
2
3
6
5
4
1 Playback condition indicator  
Indicates the current playback condition if the  
connected Bluetooth audio player features  
AVRCP 1.3.  
!
Playing files in random order  
Indicator:  
Meaning  
Does not play files in random  
order.  
Plays all audio files in the cur-  
rent repeat play range in ran-  
dom order.  
p When you are talking on a cellular phone  
connected to this unit via Bluetooth wire-  
less technology, song playback from your  
!
Setting a repeat play range  
129  
En  
 
Chapter  
26  
Using the Bluetooth audio player  
Indicator:  
Meaning  
Does not repeat.  
Repeats just the current file.  
Repeats all audio files in the  
Bluetooth audio player.  
2 Current file information  
If the connected Bluetooth audio player fea-  
tures AVRCP 1.3, the following file information  
will be displayed.  
!
!
!
!
!
: Artist name  
Shows the artist name currently playing  
(when available).  
: Album title  
Shows the title of the album for the cur-  
rent file (when available).  
: Track title  
Shows the title of the track currently  
playing (when available).  
Play time indicator  
Shows the elapsed playing time within  
the current file.  
File number indicator  
Shows the file number currently playing  
(when available).  
p In the following cases, file information  
will only be displayed after a file starts  
or resumes playing:  
— You connect the Bluetooth audio  
player compatible with AVRCP1.3,  
and operate the player to start play-  
ing.  
— You select another file when play-  
back is paused.  
3 Current time  
4 Connection status indicator  
Shows whether the device featuring Bluetooth  
technology is connected or not.  
5 Device name indicator  
6 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
130  
En  
Chapter  
Using the Bluetooth audio player  
Using the touch panel keys  
26  
1
2
3
6
5
4
1 Plays files in random order  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 172.  
6 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on this page.  
All of the files within the repeat play range  
can be played at random by touching only one  
key.  
p This function is available only when the  
connected Bluetooth audio player fea-  
tures AVRCP 1.3.  
= For details, refer to Plays files in ran-  
dom order on the next page.  
2 Sets a repeat play range  
Using the “Function” menu  
p This menu is available only when the con-  
nected Bluetooth audio player features  
AVRCP 1.3.  
The repeat play range can be changed by  
touching only one key.  
p This function is available only when the  
connected Bluetooth audio player fea-  
tures AVRCP 1.3.  
= For details, refer to Changes the repeat  
range on this page.  
%
Touch  
on the “Audio” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
1
2
3 Playback and Pause  
Touching [d] or [e] switches between play-  
back and pause.  
4 Connects the Bluetooth audio player  
Touching [Connect] displays the connection  
standby screen and the navigation system  
waits for the Bluetooth wireless connection re-  
quest.  
5 Recalls equalizer curves  
1 Changes the repeat range  
131  
En  
 
Chapter  
26  
Using the Bluetooth audio player  
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting  
as follows:  
!
!
!
All Repeat: Repeats all audio files in the  
Bluetooth audio player.  
Track Repeat: Repeats just the current  
file.  
Off: Does not repeat.  
p If you skip the file forward or backward  
when the repeat play range in “Track Re-  
peat”, the repeat play range changes to  
“All Repeat”.  
2 Plays files in random order  
Random play lets you playback files in ran-  
dom order within the current repeat range.  
Each touch of [Random] turns it on or  
off.  
132  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using the XM tuner  
27  
You can use the navigation system to control  
an XM satellite digital tuner, which is sold se-  
parately.  
For details concerning operation, refer to the  
XM tuner’s operation manuals. This section  
provides information on XM operations with  
the navigation system which differs from that  
described in the XM tuner’s operation man-  
ual.  
Category Mode  
2
3
4
5
1
7
6
The following XM satellite digital tuner units  
cannot be connected:  
About the logo for channel name  
GEX-P900XM, GEX-P910XM  
Only the logo data that is contained in the na-  
vigation system can be displayed for each  
channel. The logo of a newly established chan-  
nel that is not contained cannot be displayed.  
When a logo is not available, the following  
substitute icon is displayed.  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
Substitute icon  
2
Tap [XM] on the left edge of the screen  
to display the “XM” screen.  
p The icon of each broadcast station is con-  
tained in the NAND flash memory based  
on the data provided by XM Satellite Radio  
as of September 2009.  
p Any changes made by XM Satellite Radio  
in the lineup or icon of the broadcast sta-  
tion in the future may not be supported by  
the navigation system, and may cause the  
unit to display incorrect icons.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the XM tuner.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on page 135.  
Reading the screen  
All CH Mode  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 XM band indicator  
Shows the XM band that has been selected.  
3 Current XM station information  
Shows the detailed information of the broad-  
cast channel currently being received.  
2
3
4
5
1
!
!
!
XM channel number  
Shows the XM channel number the  
tuner is currently tuned to.  
: XM station name  
Shows the XM broadcast station name  
the tuner is currently tuned in.  
: Artist (performer) name  
7
133  
En  
 
Chapter  
27  
Using the XM tuner  
Shows the artist (performer) name cur-  
rently playing (when available).  
!
: Song title (program name)  
Shows the title of the current song (pro-  
gram).  
p “-------” is displayed if there is no corre-  
sponding information.  
4 Current time  
5 XM station information  
!
!
!
XM station name logo  
XM channel number  
Preset number  
Shows what preset item has been se-  
lected.  
6 XM channel category  
Shows the category of broadcast channel.  
7 XM channel select mode indicator  
Shows what channel select mode has been  
selected. You can select a channel from all  
channels in All CH Mode, and select a chan-  
nel from selected category in  
Category Mode.  
134  
En  
Chapter  
Using the XM tuner  
27  
Using the touch panel keys  
All CH Mode  
1
2
3
1
c
b
a
4
9
8
7
6
5
Category Mode  
d
2
3
d
c
b
a
4
9
8
7
6
5
e
1 Performs manual tuning  
You can switch the screen display according  
to your preference.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Switching between the AV operation  
screen and the list screen on page 77.  
3 Memorizes the current song  
The channels move up or down one at a time.  
p If you keep touching [o] or [p] you  
can skip the broadcasting channels.  
2 Switches between the AV operation  
screen and the preset list display  
135  
En  
 
Chapter  
27  
Using the XM tuner  
= For details, refer to Memorizing the song  
on the next page.  
4 Recalls channels from the preset  
Once you have stored broadcast channels,  
you can easily recall preset channels from  
memory with a tap of a key.  
p If you keep touching [o] or [p] you  
can skip the broadcasting channels.  
e Switches the channel category  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired cate-  
gory.  
= For details, refer to Storing and recalling  
broadcast stations on this page.  
5 Selects an XM channel directly  
= For details, refer to Selecting an XM  
channel directly on this page.  
Selecting an XM channel directly  
You can select an XM channel directly by en-  
tering the desired channel number.  
1
Touch [Direct].  
6 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 172.  
2
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired  
channel number.  
7 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on page 138.  
8 Switches the XM channel select mode  
You can switch the mode between the two  
methods for selecting and listing the channel.  
All CH Mode:  
To cancel the input numbers one by one,  
touch . Touching and holding  
to delete all input numbers.  
allows you  
3
While the input number is displayed,  
touch [Enter].  
The XM channel that was entered is selected.  
You can select a channel from all channels  
when you operate this function.  
Category Mode:  
4
Touch  
.
You return to the previous display.  
You can select a channel within a selected ca-  
tegory that you operate this function.  
9 Switches to the list display of song titles  
= For details, refer to Selecting a channel  
from the list on the next page.  
Displaying the Radio ID  
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-  
played.  
a Switches to the list display of artist  
1
2
Touch [Direct].  
names  
= For details, refer to Selecting a channel  
from the list on the next page.  
Input [000] and then touch [Enter].  
p If you select another channel, display of the  
Radio ID is canceled.  
b Switches to the list display of XM station  
names  
3
Touch  
.
= For details, refer to Selecting a channel  
from the list on the next page.  
You return to the previous display.  
c Selects an XM band  
4
Wait until the Radio ID is displayed.  
Tapping the key repeatedly switches between  
the following XM bands: XM 1, XM 2, or  
XM 3.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations  
With a tap of any of the preset tuning keys  
(“P1” to “P6”), you can easily store up to six  
broadcast channels for later recall (also with  
the tap of a key).  
p This function is convenient for preparing  
different preset lists for each band.  
d Performs manual tuning  
The channels move up or down one at a time  
within a selected category.  
136  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using the XM tuner  
27  
1
Select the channel that you want to  
3
Tap the desired channel that you want  
store in memory.  
to listen to.  
2
Display the preset channel list.  
= For details, refer to Switches between the  
AV operation screen and the preset list  
display on page 135.  
3
Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]  
to [P6].  
The selected station has been stored in mem-  
ory.  
The next time you tap the same preset tuning  
key “P1” to “P6”, the station is recalled from  
memory.  
= For details, refer to Operating list screens (e.  
g. iPod list screen) on page 77.  
p During Category Mode, touch [c] or [d]  
to switch to another category.  
p Up to 18 stations, six for each of three XM  
bands can be stored in memory.  
Using “My Mix” function  
“My Mix” function memorizes the song title  
and artist name of the song currently being re-  
ceived. When the song that matches the mem-  
orized song title and artist name is being  
broadcast on a station other than the one you  
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you  
can switch the station to listen to that song.  
p A track itself is NOT downloaded. ONLY the  
song title and the artist name are memor-  
ized.  
Selecting a channel from the list  
The list content can be switched so you can  
search for the song you want to listen to not  
only by the channel name but also by the artist  
name or song title.  
p The channel list shows all channels during  
All CH Mode, and the channels included  
in the selected category during  
Category Mode.  
1
Display a list screen.  
Memorizing the song  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to can be memorized to “My Mix”.  
= For details, refer to Switches to the list  
display of song titles on the previous  
page.  
= For details, refer to Switches to the list  
display of artist names on the previous  
page.  
= For details, refer to Switches to the list  
display of XM station names on the pre-  
vious page.  
%
Touch and hold [Memo].  
The song title and artist name of current song  
you are listening to are memorized, and a con-  
firmation message appears.  
p The song title and artist name of up to 12  
songs can be memorized. Trying to save  
more than 12 songs will result in older ones  
being overwritten.  
p You cannot memorize the song title or the  
artist name when “– – – – – – – –” is dis-  
played on the title information.  
2
Touch [List].  
XM channel list appears in the display.  
Each touch of [List] changes the screen as fol-  
lows:  
CH Name List (Channel name) —  
Song Title List (Song title) —  
Artist Name List (Artist name)  
p This function is invalid for the channel  
“000”.  
137  
En  
 
Chapter  
27  
Using the XM tuner  
p The memorized title may not be displayed  
correctly depending on the conditions.  
p You can customize the setting for the mem-  
orized songs later.  
Setting the memorized songs  
Selecting the songs to alert  
The list of song titles memorized for the MyMix  
Function (MyMix list) is displayed. You can  
change the notification setting when the song  
is broadcast again. You can enable or disable  
notification for each song.  
= For more details concerning the opera-  
tion, refer to Setting the memorized  
songs on this page.  
When the memorized song is broadcast  
1
Touch [Memo Edit].  
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.  
Touch [Yes] to switch to that station and listen  
to that track.  
p If the memorized song is not checked or  
when [Off] is selected on [Alert] on  
“Memo Edit” screen, no alert will be pro-  
vided.  
2
Touch the song title that you want to  
disable notification for.  
The check mark is removed, and the notifica-  
tion setting of the song is deactivated.  
Changing the alert setting  
= Refer to Setting the memorized songs on  
this page.  
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at  
the same time. This function is useful when  
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without  
changing each memorized song.  
p Notification may not be provided depend-  
ing on the status of the navigation system.  
p If there is even a slight difference between  
the memorized title and the title of the  
song being broadcast, no notification will  
be provided even though they are the same  
song.  
1
Touch [Memo Edit].  
2
Touch [Alert].  
Each touch of [Alert] turns it on or off.  
Deleting the memorized songs  
You can delete each one of the memorized  
songs from the song title list.  
Using the “Function” menu  
%
Touch on the “XM” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
1
Touch [Memo Edit].  
1
2
Touch and hold the song you want to  
delete.  
p To delete all songs that are memorized,  
touch [Delete All].  
3
Touch [Yes].  
1 Sets the memorized songs  
138  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
28  
You can use the navigation system to control a  
Pioneer Sirius Satellite Radio tuner, which is  
sold separately.  
For details concerning operation, refer to the  
SIRIUS tuner’s operation manuals. This sec-  
tion provides information on SIRIUS opera-  
tions with navigation system which differs  
from that described in the SIRIUS tuner’s op-  
eration manual.  
Category Mode  
2
3
4
5
1
7
p When you use the SiriusConnect universal  
tuner (sold separately) with this navigation  
system, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE is  
required. For details concerning operation,  
refer to the owner’s manual of Pioneer SIR-  
IUS BUS INTERFACE and SiriusConnect  
universal tuner.  
6
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 SIRIUS band indicator  
Shows the SIRIUS band that has been se-  
lected.  
3 SIRIUS channel number indicator  
Shows the SIRIUS channel number that the  
tuner is tuned to.  
4 Current time  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
5 Preset number indicator  
Shows what preset item has been selected.  
6 SIRIUS channel select mode indicator  
Shows what channel select mode has been  
selected. You can select a channel from all  
channels in All CH Mode, and select a chan-  
nel from the selected category in  
Category Mode.  
2
Tap [SIRIUS] on the left edge of the  
screen to display the “SIRIUS” screen.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the SIRIUS tuner.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on the next page.  
= For details concerning operations, refer  
to Switches the SIRIUS channel se-  
lect mode on page 141.  
7 Variable information area  
Reading the screen  
All CH Mode  
Shows various information about the broad-  
cast channel currently being received.  
= For more details about the displayed in-  
formation, refer to Switches the SIR-  
IUS display on page 141.  
2
3
4
5
1
7
6
139  
En  
 
Chapter  
28  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
Using the touch panel keys  
All CH Mode  
1
2
3
4
b
a
5
9
8
7
6
Category Mode  
1
2
3
4
b
a
5
9
8
7
6
c
1 Switches the SIRIUS Instant replay mode  
= For details, refer to Using the “Instant  
Replay” function on page 142.  
p If you keep touching [o] or [p] you  
can skip the broadcasting channels.  
3 Selects a SIRIUS channel directly  
= For details, refer to Selecting a SIRIUS  
channel directly on the next page.  
4 Memorizes the current song  
2 Performs manual tuning  
The channels move up or down one at a time.  
140  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
28  
= For details, refer to Memorizing the song  
on the next page.  
Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly  
You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by  
entering the desired channel number.  
5 Recalls channels from the preset  
Tap to recall the preset channel.  
= For details, refer to Storing and recalling  
broadcast stations on this page.  
6 Switches the SIRIUS display  
Each touch of [Disp] changes the display in-  
formation.  
1
Touch [Direct].  
2
Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired  
channel number.  
To cancel the input numbers one by one,  
touch . Touching and holding  
to delete all input numbers.  
allows you  
Channel number — Channel name — Chan-  
nel category — Artist name/feature — Song/  
program title — Composer  
3
While the input number is displayed,  
7 Recalls equalizer curves  
touch [Enter].  
The SIRIUS channel that was entered se-  
lected.  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 172.  
8 Displays the “Function” menu  
= For details, refer to Using the  
“Function” menu on page 143.  
9 Switches the SIRIUS channel select  
mode  
4
Touch  
.
You return to the previous display.  
Display the Radio ID  
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-  
played.  
You can switch the mode between the two  
methods for selecting and listing the channel.  
All CH Mode:  
You can select a channel from all channels  
when you operate this function.  
Category Mode:  
1
Touch [Direct].  
2
Input [000] and then touch [Enter].  
You can select a channel within a selected ca-  
tegory that you operate this function.  
a Switches between the AV operation  
screen and the preset list display  
You can switch the screen display according  
to your preference.  
If you select another channel, display of the  
Radio ID is canceled.  
3
Touch  
.
You return to the previous display.  
= For details of the operation, refer to  
Switching between the AV operation  
screen and the list screen on page 77.  
b Selects a SIRIUS band  
4
Wait until the Radio ID is displayed.  
Storing and recalling broadcast  
stations  
With a tap of any of the preset tuning keys  
(“Preset 1” to “Preset 6”), you can easily store  
up to six broadcast stations for later recall  
(also with the tap of a key).  
Tapping the key repeatedly switches between  
the following SIRIUS bands: SIRIUS1,  
SIRIUS2, or SIRIUS3.  
p This function is convenient for preparing  
different preset lists for each band.  
c Switches the channel category  
Touch [c] or [d] to select the desired cate-  
gory.  
1
Select the channel that you want to  
store in memory.  
141  
En  
 
Chapter  
28  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
2
3
Display the preset channel list.  
= For details, refer to Switches between the  
AV operation screen and the preset list  
display on the previous page.  
Touch [Jump] to switch to that station, and  
you can listen to that track. If you touch  
[Stay], the channel does not switch.  
p If the alert for the song is “Off” or set  
“Alert” to “Off”, no notification will be pro-  
vided even when that song is broadcast.  
= For details, refer to Setting the memor-  
ized songs on the next page.  
Keep touching a preset tuning key  
[Preset 1] to [Preset 6].  
The selected station has been stored in mem-  
ory.  
The next time you tap the same preset tuning  
key “Preset 1” to “Preset 6” the station is re-  
called from memory.  
p Notification may not be provided depend-  
ing on the situation of the Navigation Sys-  
tem.  
= For details, refer to Selecting the songs  
to alert on the next page.  
p Up to 18 stations, six for each of three SIR-  
IUS bands can be stored in memory.  
Using the “Instant Replay” function  
Using “My Mix” function  
The “Instant Replay” function allows you to  
replay the stored broadcast on Pioneer SIRIUS  
BUS INTERFACE (if Pioneer SIRIUS BUS IN-  
TERFACE capable for this function). As soon  
as you tune to a channel, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS  
INTERFACE automatically begins storing the  
broadcast. It can store approximately up to 44  
minutes previous (depending on the selected  
channel and the memory capacity of Pioneer  
SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE).  
The MyMix function memorizes the song title  
and artist name of the song currently being re-  
ceived. When a track that matches the memor-  
ized song title and artist name is being  
broadcast on a station other than the one you  
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you  
can switch the station to listen to that song.  
p The track itself is NOT downloaded; only  
the song title and the artist name are mem-  
orized.  
1
Touch [Instant Replay] on the SIRIUS  
screen to activate the “Instant Replay”  
mode.  
Memorizing the song  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to can be memorized.  
2
Touch keys for “Instant Replay”.  
%
Touch and hold [Memo].  
Touch panel  
keys  
Action  
The song title and artist name of the song you  
are listening to can be memorized.  
p Up to 10 song titles and artist names can be  
memorized.  
Return to the start of the current  
song or program. Touching again  
will skip back to the previous song  
or program.  
[o]  
p You cannot memorize a song that does not  
have song title and artist name information.  
p You cannot memorize the song title or the  
artist name of channel “000”.  
[o] and hold  
[p]  
Fast reverses.  
Forwards play to the next song or  
program  
p The memorized title may not be displayed  
correctly.  
[p] and hold  
[f]  
Fast-forwards.  
Touching [f] switches between  
playback and pause.  
When the memorized song is broadcast  
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.  
142  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
28  
p During “Instant Replay” mode, each touch  
of [Disp] changes the display information  
as follows;  
2
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
desired song.  
Time position — Channel number — Chan-  
nel name — Channel category — Artist  
name/feature — Song/program title —  
Composer  
p You cannot replay the broadcast prior to the  
beginning of stored data.  
3
Touch [On/Off] to turn the setting on.  
Using the “Function” menu  
When the alert for the song is activated, [On]  
appears at the beginning of the selected title.  
p Touch [On/Off] again to turn the setting off.  
%
Touch on the “SIRIUS” screen.  
The “Function” menu appears.  
1
2
3
Changing the alert setting  
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at  
the same time. This function is useful when  
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without  
changing each memorized song.  
1
Touch [Memo Edit].  
2
Touch [Alert].  
1 Sets the memorized songs  
Each touch of [Alert] turns it on or off.  
2 Uses the Game Alert function  
3 Displays Game Information  
= For details of each function, refer to sec-  
tions below with the relative titles.  
Deleting the memorized songs  
You can delete each one of the memorized  
tracks from the song title list.  
1
Touch [Memo Edit].  
Setting the memorized songs  
Selecting the songs to alert  
You can change the setting of the alert when  
the track is broadcast again. You can enable  
or disable alert for each song.  
2
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
song title that you want to delete.  
3
Touch [Delete] when the song you  
want to delete is displayed.  
A message will appear asking you to confirm  
the deletion.  
1
Touch [Memo Edit].  
4
Touch [Yes].  
143  
En  
 
Chapter  
28  
Using the SIRIUS tuner  
When a game involving one of your  
teams is broadcast  
A message is displayed. Touch [Jump] to  
switch the station, and you can view the game  
information. If you touch [Stay], the channel  
does not switch.  
Using the Game Alert function  
Selecting teams for Game Alert  
This navigation system can alert you when  
games involving your favorite sports teams are  
about to start. To use this function you need to  
store the teams you want to follow in advance.  
p Alerts may not be provided depending on  
the status of the navigation system.  
1
Touch [Game Alert].  
2
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
Displaying Game Information  
league.  
An alert will be displayed when a game with  
the team you selected is about to start (or is  
currently under way). You can also display  
game information and changes to the broad-  
cast channel.  
p The Game Information function is available  
when “Alert” is “On” in “Game Alert”.  
1
Touch [Game Info].  
3
Touch [c Prev] or [Next d] to select the  
2
Touch [Prev] or [Next] to view the game  
team.  
score information which is registered.  
p The game score will be updated automati-  
cally.  
p Touch [Tune To] to switch to the channel  
that broadcasts the displayed game.  
p If you have not made any team selections,  
“Not Set” is displayed.  
p When no games involving your favorite  
teams are currently being played  
“NO GAME” is displayed.  
4
Touch [On/Off].  
The team displayed as [On] is the alert target.  
p When the selected team is excluded from  
the alert target, the team is displayed as  
[Off]. Up to 12 teams can be selected.  
When you have already made 12 team se-  
lections, “FULL” is displayed and additional  
team selection is not possible. In this case,  
first delete the team selection and then try  
again.  
Changing the alert setting  
You can enable or disable the alert for selected  
items. This function is useful when you want  
to turn the alert off temporarily without chan-  
ging the setting of each selected team.  
1
Touch [Game Alert].  
2
Touch [Alert].  
Each touch of [Alert] turns it on or off.  
144  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using AV input  
29  
You can display the video image output by the  
equipment connected to the navigation sys-  
tem. For details of the connection method,  
refer to Installation Manual.  
Using AV2  
You can display the video image output by the  
equipment connected to video input 2.  
1
Touch [AV2 Input] on the “AV System  
Settings” menu.  
CAUTION  
= For details, refer to Setting video input 2  
(AV2) on page 168.  
For safety reasons, video images cannot be  
viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view  
video images, you must stop in a safe place and  
apply the parking brake.  
2
3
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
Reading the screen  
Tap [AV2] on the left edge of the  
screen.  
The image is displayed on the screen.  
2
4
Touch the screen to display the touch  
1
panel keys.  
Using the touch panel keys  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 Current time  
Using AV1  
You can display the video image output by the  
1
2
equipment connected to video input 1.  
1 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 172.  
2 Hides the touch panel keys  
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.  
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display  
the touch panel keys again.  
1
Touch [AV1 Input] on the “AV System  
Settings” menu.  
= For details, refer to Setting video input 1  
(AV1) on page 168.  
2
3
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
Tap [AV1] on the left edge of the  
screen.  
The image is displayed on the screen.  
4
Touch the screen to display the touch  
panel keys.  
145  
En  
 
Chapter  
30  
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)  
The term “external unit” refers to future  
Reading the screen  
Pioneer devices that are not currently planned  
for, or to devices that allow control of basic  
functions although they are not fully con-  
trolled by the navigation system. Two external  
units can be controlled by this navigation sys-  
tem. When two external units are connected,  
the navigation system allocates them as exter-  
nal unit 1 or external unit 2.  
2
3
4
1
For details of the connection method, refer to  
Installation Manual.  
1 Source icon  
Shows which source has been selected.  
2 External unit indicator  
Displays the information that is sent by con-  
nected external units.  
3 Current time  
For details of the operation, refer to the exter-  
nal unit’s operation manual. This section pro-  
vides information on external unit operations  
with the navigation system that differ from  
those described in the external unit’s opera-  
tion manual.  
4 Auto/Manual mode indicator  
Shows the current mode.  
p Operation varies depending on the external  
unit connected. (In some cases, the exter-  
nal unit may not respond.)  
Starting procedure  
1
Display the AV operation screen.  
= For details of the operations, refer to Dis-  
playing the AV operation screen on page 77.  
2
Tap [EXT1] or [EXT2] on the left edge of  
the screen to select the external unit.  
3
Use the touch panel keys on the screen  
to control the external unit.  
= For details, refer to Using the touch panel  
keys on the next page.  
146  
En  
 
Chapter  
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)  
30  
Using the touch panel keys  
1
2
3
6
5
4
1 Sends a 1 key to 6 key command  
The external unit can be operated by transmit-  
ting the operating commands set to F1  
through F4.  
p The operating commands set to F1  
through F4 vary depending on the exter-  
nal unit.  
The external unit can be operated by transmit-  
ting the operating commands set to 1 key  
through 6 key.  
p Operation varies depending on the ex-  
ternal unit connected. (In some cases,  
some functions may not be used until  
you touch and hold the key.)  
p Some functions may not be used until  
you touch and hold the key.  
2 Sends a command [a], [b], [c], or [d]  
Touch to operate the external unit.  
p Operation varies depending on the ex-  
ternal unit connected. (In some cases,  
some functions may not be used until  
you touch and hold the key.)  
5 Sends a band command  
Touch to send a band command to the exter-  
nal unit.  
p Operation varies depending on the ex-  
ternal unit connected. (In some cases,  
the external unit may not respond.)  
6 Recalls equalizer curves  
= For details, refer to Using the equalizer  
on page 172.  
3 Switches between automatic and manual  
function  
You can turn automatic and manual function  
on or off.  
You can switch between Auto and Manual  
functions of the external unit connected.  
Initially, this function is set to Auto.  
p Operating commands set for Auto and  
Manual operations vary depending on  
the external unit connected.  
4 Uses F1 through F4 to operate the external  
unit  
147  
En  
 
Chapter  
31  
Customizing preferences  
2
Touch [Connection Status].  
Displaying the “Navi  
Settings” screen  
The “GPS Status” screen appears.  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
1
2
3
4
5
“Top Menu” screen.  
2
Touch [Settings].  
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.  
p This can also be operated using the “Short-  
cut Menu” screen.  
1 Speed Pulse  
3
Touch [Navi Settings].  
The Speed Pulse value detected by the navi-  
gation system is shown. “0” is shown while  
the vehicle is stationary.  
2 GPS Antenna  
Indicates the connection status of the GPS  
antenna, the reception sensitivity, and from  
how many satellites the signal is received.  
Signal com-  
munication  
Used in posi-  
tioning  
Color  
The “Navi Settings” menu appears.  
Touch the item that you want to  
Orange  
Yellow  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
4
change the setting.  
p When the GPS antenna is connected to  
this navigation system, “OK” is dis-  
played.  
When the GPS antenna is not con-  
nected to this navigation system, “NOK”  
is displayed.  
p If reception is poor, please change the  
installation position of the GPS antenna.  
3 Parking Brake  
#
Touch  
.
Returns the previous screen.  
When the parking brake is applied, “On” is  
displayed. When the parking brake is re-  
leased, “Off” is displayed.  
Checking the connections  
of leads  
Check that leads are properly connected be-  
tween the navigation system and the vehicle.  
Please also check whether they are connected  
in the correct positions.  
4 Illumination  
When the headlights or small lamps of a ve-  
hicle are on, “On” is displayed. When the  
small lamps of a vehicle are off, “Off” is dis-  
played. (If the orange/white lead is not con-  
nected, “Off” appears.)  
5 Back Signal  
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Navi  
Settings” screen on this page.  
148  
En  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
31  
When the gear lever is shifted to “R”, the  
signal switches to “High” or “Low”. (One of  
these is displayed depending on the  
vehicle.)  
Indicates the degree of slope of the street  
that you are currently on.  
7 Degree of learning  
Sensor learning situations for distance  
(Distance), right turn (Right Turn), left turn  
(Left Turn) and 3D detection (3D) are indi-  
cated by the length of bars.  
p When tires have been changed or  
chains fitted, turning on the Speed  
Pulse allows the system to detect the  
fact that the tire diameter has changed,  
and automatically replaces the value for  
calculating distance.  
Checking sensor learning  
status and driving status  
p The navigation system can automatically  
use its sensor memory based on the outer  
dimensions of the tires.  
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Navi  
Settings” screen on the previous page.  
p If a separately sold speed pulse genera-  
tor (ND-PG1) is connected, the distance  
calculation value cannot be replaced  
automatically.  
2
Touch [3D Calibration Status].  
The “3D Calibration Status” screen appears.  
Clearing status  
You can delete the learned results stored in  
[Distance], [Speed Pulse] or [Learning Sta-  
tus].  
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
1
Touch [Distance] or [Speed Pulse].  
The following message appears.  
1 Speed  
Indicates the speed detected by the naviga-  
tion system. (This indication may be differ-  
ent from the actual speed of your vehicle,  
so please do not use this instead of the  
speedometer.)  
2 Acceleration or deceleration/Rotational  
speed  
2
Touch [Yes].  
Indicates acceleration or deceleration velo-  
city of your vehicle. Also, rotational speed  
when your vehicle turns to left or right is  
shown.  
Clears the results stored in [Distance] or  
[Speed Pulse].  
3
Touch [Learning Status].  
3 Distance  
Indicates driving distance.  
4 Speed Pulse  
The following message appears.  
Indicates the total number of speed pulses.  
5 Learning Status  
Indicates the current driving mode.  
6 Inclination  
149  
En  
 
Chapter  
31  
Customizing preferences  
3
Enter the fuel consumption informa-  
tion.  
4
Touch [All].  
Clears all learning statuses.  
p Touch [All] for the following cases:  
Enter the following items:  
!
!
!
After changing the installation position  
of the navigation system  
After changing the installation angle of  
the navigation system  
After moving the navigation system to  
another vehicle  
!
Surface Road Gas Mileage:  
Enter the fuel cost when you drive on ordin-  
ary roads.  
p How the fuel cost is entered depends on  
the “Gas Unit” setting.  
— When “Gas Unit” is set to “Liter”.  
Enter how much fuel you need to tra-  
vel 60 miles (100 kilometers).  
— When “Gas Unit” is set to “Gallon”.  
Enter how many kilometers (miles)  
you get to a gallon.  
#
Touch [Distance].  
Clears the learned results stored in [Distance].  
p When the distance accuracy is low, touch  
[Distance].  
!
Freeway Gas Mileage:  
Enter the fuel cost when you drive on the  
freeway.  
p How the fuel cost is entered depends on  
the “Gas Unit” setting.  
Using the “Gas Mileage”  
function  
Inputting the fuel consumption  
information for calculating the  
fuel cost  
You can estimate the fuel cost to your destina-  
tion by entering the fuel consumption informa-  
tion in the navigation system.  
— When “Gas Unit” is set to “Liter”.  
Enter how much fuel you need to tra-  
vel 60 miles (100 kilometers).  
— When “Gas Unit” is set to “Gallon”.  
Enter how many kilometers (miles)  
you get to a gallon.  
= For details, refer to Setting a route to your  
destination on page 41.  
!
!
!
Gas Price Per Unit:  
Enter the fuel unit price.  
Gas Unit:  
Set the fuel unit.  
Currency:  
Set the unit of currency.  
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Navi  
Settings” screen on page 148.  
When all the items are entered, inputting the  
fuel consumption information is complete.  
2
Touch [Gas Mileage].  
The “Gas Mileage Setting” screen appears.  
150  
En  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
31  
!
Distance:  
Calculating the fuel consumption  
Enter the distance traveled since the pre-  
vious fueling.  
p The distance is entered automatically  
only when the distance traveled since  
the previous fueling is recorded.  
Gas Pumped:  
Enter the amount of fuel pumped.  
Gas Price Per Unit:  
Enter the fuel unit price.  
When you enter the fueling information to the  
navigation system, and export the data to SD  
memory cards, you can check the fuel con-  
sumption information by using the utility pro-  
gram AVIC FEEDS, which is available  
separately, on your PC.  
p Up to 24 sets of data can be stored. You  
can also export the data, as described  
below.  
!
!
When all the items are entered, the fuel con-  
sumption is displayed next to “Gas Mileage”.  
If the entries reach the maximum number,  
a new entry will overwrite the oldest one.  
5
Touch [OK].  
These calculations are based only on the infor-  
mation that you provide and not on any data  
from the vehicle. The fuel mileage displayed is  
only a reference value, and does not guarantee  
the fuel mileage displayed can be obtained.  
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Navi  
Settings” screen on page 148.  
The “Gas Mileage Setting” screen appears.  
2
Touch [Gas Mileage].  
The “Gas Mileage Setting” screen appears.  
Exporting the data of fuel cost  
information  
3
Touch [Gas Price Calculation].  
Exporting the fuel cost data to an SD memory  
card is possible.  
p The data stored in this navigation system  
will be cleared as exporting it to the SD  
memory card.  
p If there is previous data in the SD memory  
card, the data is overwritten with new data  
when current data is exported.  
The “Gas Price Calculation” screen appears.  
Enter the fuel consumption informa-  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
4
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 15.  
tion.  
2
3
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Navi  
Settings” screen on page 148.  
Touch [Gas Mileage].  
The “Gas Mileage Setting” screen appears.  
Enter the following items:  
151  
En  
 
Chapter  
31  
Customizing preferences  
4
Touch [Export].  
5
Touch [Type].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
Private (default):  
Changes the track log attribute to “Private”.  
!
Business:  
Changes the track log attribute to “Busi-  
ness”.  
!
Other:  
Changes the track log attribute to  
After a message confirming whether to export  
the data appeared, exporting the data to the  
SD memory card starts.  
“Other”.  
The “Gas Mileage Setting” screen appears  
when it is done.  
Using the demonstration  
guidance  
This is a demonstration function for retail  
stores. After a route is set, touching this key  
starts the simulation of route guidance.  
Recording your travel history  
Activating the track logger enables you to re-  
cord your driving history (called “track log”  
below). You can review the travel history later.  
p If an SD memory card is inserted into the  
SD card slot, the track logs will be stored in  
the SD memory card.  
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Navi  
Settings” screen on page 148.  
2
Touch [Demo Mode].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
!
On:  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 15.  
Repeats demo drive.  
Off (default):  
Demo Mode is set off.  
!
2
3
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Navi  
Settings” screen on page 148.  
3
Display the map screen.  
The demonstration guidance will begin.  
Touch [Drive Log Settings].  
Registering your home  
The “Drive Log Settings” screen appears.  
Registering your home position saves time  
and effort. Also, routes to home positions can  
be calculated easily with a single touch of the  
key from the “Destination Menu”. The regis-  
tered home position can also be modified  
later.  
4
Touch [Drive Log Settings].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
On:  
You can export your track log to the SD  
memory card.  
!
Off (default):  
You cannot export your track log to the SD  
memory card.  
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Navi  
Settings” screen on page 148.  
p While the setting is “On”, the navigation  
system continues to store the track logs in  
the inserted SD memory card.  
2
Touch [Set Home].  
The “Set Home” screen appears.  
152  
En  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
31  
3
Touch [Home].  
1
2
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Navi  
Settings” screen on page 148.  
Touch [Eco Settings].  
The “Eco Settings” screen appears.  
3
Touch each item.  
The “Select Search method” screen appears.  
Touch [Phone#].  
#
When you have already registered your home,  
you can edit your home number.  
4
Search for a location.  
= For details, refer to Chapter 6.  
Eco Score  
After searching for a point, the map of the se-  
lected position is displayed.  
!
On (default):  
Displays “Eco Score”.  
Off:  
5
Touch [OK].  
!
The location is registered, and then the “Set  
Home” screen appears.  
Hides “Eco Score”.  
= For details, refer to Displaying “Eco Graph”  
on page 31.  
6
Touch [OK].  
Eco Drive Level  
The registration is completed.  
!
On (default):  
After you arrive the destination, a message  
appears and a beep sounds if the level of  
“Eco Drive Level” have increased or de-  
creased.  
Correcting the current location  
Touch the screen to adjust the current position  
and direction of the vehicle displayed on the  
map.  
!
Off:  
No message appears and no sound beeps  
when the vehicle reaches the destination.  
1
Display the “Navi Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Navi  
Settings” screen on page 148.  
= For details, refer to Displaying Eco Drive  
Level guidance on page 32.  
Rapid Start Warning  
!
On:  
2
3
Touch [Modify Current Location].  
A message appears and a sound beeps  
when the vehicle experiences a sudden  
start.  
Scroll to the position where you want  
to set, then touch [OK].  
!
Off (default):  
4
Touch the arrow key on the screen to  
No message appears and no sound beeps  
when the vehicle experiences a sudden  
start.  
set the direction, then touch [OK].  
= For details, refer to Sudden start alert on  
page 32.  
Clear Eco Record  
Changing the eco-function  
setting  
Fuel consumption data are cleared.  
You can change the eco-function setting.  
4
Touch [OK].  
The settings are completed.  
153  
En  
 
Chapter  
31  
Customizing preferences  
1
2
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on this page.  
Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
Touch [Displayed Info].  
“Top Menu” screen.  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
2
Touch [Settings].  
3
Touch [Close Up View].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
On (default):  
Switches to an enlarged map.  
Off:  
!
Does not switch to an enlarged map.  
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.  
Touch [Map Settings].  
3
The “Map Settings” screen appears.  
Touch the item that you want to  
4
change the setting.  
#
Touch  
.
Returns the previous screen.  
Setting the auto-zoom display  
This setting enables switching to an enlarged  
map around the point where your vehicle is  
approaching an intersection, entrance/exit of  
freeway or a junction.  
154  
En  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
31  
3
Touch [City Map Barrier].  
Setting the detailed city map  
Each time you touch the key switches between  
“On” and “Off”.  
You can select whether to display the city map  
when in certain metropolitan city areas.  
p The detailed city map and this setting are  
available for AVIC-Z120BT only.  
p The city map is displayed when the map  
scale is 0.05 mile (50 meters) or less.  
!
On (default):  
Displays the barrier graphic for city map.  
When the vehicle position or cursor enters  
the barrier graphic area, the graphic disap-  
pears and a normal map is displayed full  
screen.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on the previous page.  
!
Off:  
Does not display the barrier graphic for city  
map. When the vehicle position or cursor  
enters the area where no city map data is  
available, a normal map is displayed full  
screen.  
2
Touch [Displayed Info].  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
3
Touch [City Map].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
Displaying the traffic  
notification icon  
Selects whether to display or hide the traffic  
notification icons on the map when incidents  
occur on your route.  
!
On (default):  
Automatically switches to the city map  
when in a city map area.  
!
Off:  
Does not show the city map.  
p Even if you switch “City Map” to “On”,  
city map cannot be displayed in areas  
where there is no city map data.  
= For details, refer to Checking traffic informa-  
tion manually on page 58.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on the previous page.  
Setting the barrier graphic  
for city map  
On the city map screen, you can display a  
“barrier graphic” pattern where no city map  
data is available. This prevents a normal map  
of a different scale from being displayed at the  
same time, greatly enhancing the clarity of the  
city map on screen.  
2
Touch [Displayed Info].  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Show Traffic Incident].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
View (default):  
Displays the icons on the map.  
Hide:  
p The detailed city map and this setting are  
available for AVIC-Z120BT only.  
!
Hides the icons on the map.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on the previous page.  
2
Touch [Displayed Info].  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
155  
En  
 
Chapter  
31  
Customizing preferences  
Displaying the Bluetooth  
connection icon  
Selects whether to display or hide the icon for  
current status of the phone connection via  
Bluetooth wireless technology.  
Setting the “Favorites” icon  
display  
You can select whether to display the “Favor-  
ites” icon on the map.  
p Favorites icons are displayed when the  
map scale is 10 mile (20 kilometers) or less.  
= For details, refer to Editing the entry in the  
“Favorites” list on page 46.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on page 154.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on page 154.  
2
Touch [Displayed Info].  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Bluetooth Connected].  
2
Touch [Displayed Info].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
!
!
View (default):  
Displays the Bluetooth connection icon on  
the map.  
Hide:  
Hides the Bluetooth connection icon on the  
map.  
3 Touch [Favorites Icon].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
On (default):  
Displays the “Favorites” icon on the map.  
Off:  
!
= For details about the Bluetooth connection  
icon, refer to Bluetooth connection icon  
on page 26.  
Hides the “Favorites” icon on the map.  
Displaying the 3D landmarks  
You can select whether to display the 3D land-  
mark on the map.  
p The 3D landmarks and this setting are  
available for AVIC-Z120BT only.  
p 3D landmark only appears when the view  
mode is “3D View” and the map scale is  
set to 0.25 mile (200 m) or lower.  
Setting the current street  
name display  
Selects whether to display or hide the street  
name (or city name) that your vehicle is travel-  
ing along.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on page 154.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on page 154.  
2
Touch [Displayed Info].  
2
Touch [Displayed Info].  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Current Street Name].  
3
Touch [3D Land Mark].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
View (default):  
Displays the street name (or city name) on  
the map.  
Hide:  
Hides the street name (or city name) on the  
map.  
!
On (default):  
Displays the 3D landmark on the map.  
Off:  
!
!
Hides the 3D landmark on the map.  
156  
En  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
Displaying maneuvers  
31  
Displaying the fuel  
Selects whether to display or hide maneuvers  
on the map.  
consumption information  
Selects whether to display Eco-Meter, indicat-  
ing the fuel consumption information, on the  
map.  
Maneuvers  
p Eco-Meter appears when “2D View” or  
“3D View” is selected.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on page 154.  
2
Touch [Displayed Info].  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
1
2
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on page 154.  
3
Touch [Show Eco Meter].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
Touch [Displayed Info].  
!
!
View (default):  
Displays Eco-Meter on the map.  
Hide:  
The “Displayed Information” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Show Maneuver].  
Hides Eco-Meter on the map.  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
!
View (default):  
Displays maneuvers on the map.  
Hide:  
Displaying POI on the map  
Displays icons for the surrounding facilities  
(POI) on the map.  
Hides maneuvers on the map.  
p POI icons are not displayed when the map  
scale is 0.75 mile (1 kilometers) or more.  
Displaying the MSN Direct  
icons  
Selects whether to display or hide the received  
MSN Direct icons on the map.  
= For details of the icons, refer to How to read  
MSN Direct information on the map on  
page 54.  
Displaying preinstalled POIs on  
the map  
p You can select up to 10 items from the sub-  
categories or detailed categories.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on page 154.  
%
Touch [MSN Direct].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
2
Touch [Overlay POI].  
!
On (default):  
Displays the icons on the map.  
Off:  
The “Overlay POI” screen appears.  
!
Hides the icons on the map.  
157  
En  
 
Chapter  
31  
Customizing preferences  
3
Touch [Display] to change the setting to  
gories, all detailed categories within the sub-  
category is selected and [Detail] becomes  
inactive.  
“On”.  
#
Touch [Detail].  
The detailed category list is displayed. Touch the  
item and touch [OK] to complete selecting the  
detailed categories you want to display.  
p When only a few types of the detailed cate-  
gories are selected, blue check marks will  
appear.  
7
Touch [OK].  
p If you do not want to display the POI icon  
The “Overlay POI (Main Category)” screen  
returns.  
If you want to select or deselect other items,  
repeat these steps as many as necessary.  
on the map, touch [Display] to turn it  
“Off”. (Even if “Display” is turned “Off”,  
the POI selection setting is retained.)  
4
Touch [POI].  
The “Overlay POI (Main Category)” screen  
appears.  
8
To finish the selection, touch [OK] in  
the “Overlay POI (Main Category)” screen.  
5
Touch the main category you want.  
Displaying the customized POIs  
Creating a customized POI is possible by  
using the utility program AVIC FEEDS which is  
available separately, on your PC. (AVIC FEEDS  
will be available on our website.) Storing the  
customized POI properly and inserting the SD  
memory card enables the system to display  
the icons on the map screen.  
p You can select up to 10 items from the sub-  
categories or detailed categories.  
A list of subcategories under the selected  
main category appears.  
p Categories that are already selected will  
1
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
have a blue check mark.  
card slot.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 15.  
6
Touch the subcategory to display.  
2
3
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on page 154.  
Touch [Overlay POI].  
The “Overlay POI” screen appears.  
A red check mark appears next to the selected  
category. To cancel the selection, touch the  
entry again.  
If there are more detailed categories within the  
subcategory, [Detail] is active. If you select  
the subcategory that has more detailed cate-  
158  
En  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
31  
4
Touch [Display] to change the setting to  
2
Touch [Day/Night Display].  
“On”.  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
!
Automatic (default):  
You can change the colors of a map be-  
tween daytime and nighttime according to  
whether the vehicle lights are on or off.  
Day:  
The map is always displayed with daytime  
colors.  
p To use this function with “Automatic”, the  
orange/white lead of the navigation system  
must be connected correctly.  
p If you do not want to display the POI icon  
on the map, touch [Display] to turn it  
“Off”. (Even if “Display” is turned “Off”,  
the POI selection setting is retained.)  
Changing the road color  
You can set the road color to bluish or reddish.  
5
Touch [Custom POI].  
The list of POI categories appears.  
6 Touch the items you want to display.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on page 154.  
2
Touch [Road Color].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
“Blue” (default):  
Changes to blue based road colors.  
“Red”:  
!
Changes to red based road colors.  
7
To finish the selection, touch [OK].  
Changing “View Mode”  
Various types of screen displays can be se-  
lected for navigation guidance.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Switch-  
ing the view mode on page 29.  
Setting the map color change  
between day and night  
To improve the visibility of the map during the  
evening, you can set the timing for changing  
the combination of the map color.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on page 154.  
159  
En  
 
Chapter  
31  
Customizing preferences  
Register information on the location indi-  
cated by the cursor to “Favorites”.  
= For details, refer to Registering a location  
by scroll mode on page 46.  
: Vicinity Search*  
Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity  
of the cursor.  
= For details, refer to Searching for a nearby  
POI on page 37.  
: Overlay POI*  
Displays icons for surrounding facilities  
(POI) on the map.  
Changing the setting of  
navigation interruption screen  
Set whether to automatically switch to the na-  
vigation screen from the audio screen when  
your vehicle approaches a guidance point  
such as an intersection while displaying a  
screen other than navigation.  
!
!
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on page 154.  
= For details, refer to Displaying POI on the  
map on page 157.  
: Volume*  
2
Touch [AV Guide Mode].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
!
!
Displays the “Volume Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Setting the Volume  
for Guidance and Phone on page 163.  
: Contacts*  
Displays the “Contacts List” screen.  
= For details, refer to Calling a number in  
the “Contacts List” on page 69.  
: Whole Route Overview  
!
On (default):  
Switches from the AV operation screen to  
the map screen.  
!
Off:  
Does not switch the screen.  
p This setting is effective only when “Close  
Up View” is set to “On”.  
Displays the entire route (currently set) with  
the “Route Overview” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the  
“Route Overview” screen on page 42.  
: Stock Info  
Displays stock prices.  
= For details, refer to Browsing stock  
quotes on page 61.  
Selecting the “Quick Access”  
menu  
Select items to display on the map screen. In  
the list displayed on screen, the items with red  
checks are displayed on the map screen.  
Touch the item you want to display and then  
touch [OK] when a red check appears. You  
can select up to five items.  
!
!
: Traffic On Route  
Displays a list of traffic information on the  
route.  
= For details, refer to Checking traffic infor-  
mation on the route on page 56.  
: Traffic Events  
Displays a list of traffic events information.  
= For details, refer to Checking all traffic in-  
formation on page 55.  
1
Display the “Map Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Map  
Settings” screen on page 154.  
!
!
2
Touch [Quick Access Selection].  
The “Quick Access Selection” screen appears.  
: Day/Night Display  
3
Touch the item that you want to set in  
Switches Day/Night Display setting.  
= For details, refer to Setting the map color  
change between day and night on the  
previous page.  
: Favorites Icon  
Switches Favorites Icon setting.  
“Quick Access”.  
You can select the following items:  
p Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show  
that these are default or factory settings.  
!
!
: Registration*  
160  
En  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
31  
= For details, refer to Setting the “Favor-  
2
Touch [Regional Settings].  
ites” icon display on page 156.  
The “Regional Settings” screen appears.  
4
To finish the setting, touch [OK].  
Displaying the “System  
Settings” screen  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
“Top Menu” screen.  
Selecting the language  
2
Touch [Settings].  
You can set the languages used on the pro-  
gram and voice guidance. Each language can  
be set separately.  
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.  
p This can also be operated using the “Short-  
cut Menu” screen.  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” screen on this page.  
3
Touch [System Settings].  
2
Touch [Regional Settings].  
The “Regional Settings” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Program Language].  
The language list is displayed.  
4
Touch the desired language.  
The “System Settings” screen appears.  
Touch the item that you want to  
After the language is selected, the previous  
screen returns.  
4
change the setting.  
5
Touch [Voice Language].  
The “Voice Language Selection” screen ap-  
pears.  
6
Touch the desired language.  
After the language is selected, the previous  
screen returns.  
7
Touch [OK] on the “Regional Settings”  
screen.  
#
Touch  
.
A message confirming whether to restart the  
navigation system appears.  
Returns the previous screen.  
8
Touch [OK].  
The navigation system restarts.  
Press the MODE button or the HOME button.  
Cancels the setting of the languages.  
Customizing the regional settings  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” screen on this page.  
#
161  
En  
 
Chapter  
31  
Customizing preferences  
Setting the time difference  
Changing the unit between km and miles  
Adjusts the system’s clock. Set the time differ-  
ence (+, –) from the time originally set in your  
navigation system.  
This setting controls the unit of distance and  
speed displayed on your navigation system.  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” screen on the previous page.  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” screen on the previous page.  
2
Touch [Regional Settings].  
2
Touch [Regional Settings].  
The “Regional Settings” screen appears.  
The “Regional Settings” screen appears.  
3
Touch [km / mile].  
3
Touch [Time].  
A message confirming whether to change the  
setting appears.  
The “Time Settings” screen appears.  
4
To set the time difference, touch [+] or  
4
Touch [Yes].  
[–].  
The setting is changed as follows:  
!
!
!
mile (default):  
Shows distance in miles.  
Mile&Yard:  
Shows distance in miles and yards.  
km:  
Shows distance in kilometers.  
#
Touch [No].  
Cancels the setting.  
The time difference between the time origin-  
ally set in the navigation system (Pacific Stan-  
dard Time) and the current location of your  
vehicle is shown. If necessary, adjust the time  
difference. Touching [+] or [–] changes the  
time difference display in half-hour incre-  
ments.  
Changing the virtual speed of the vehicle  
When calculating the expected time of arrival  
and the travel time to the destination, set the  
average speed for the freeway or ordinary  
roads using [+] and [–].  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” screen on the previous page.  
The time difference can be set from –4 to +9  
hours.  
5
Touch [Summer Time].  
2
Touch [Regional Settings].  
If necessary, set to summer time.  
The “Regional Settings” screen appears.  
Summer time setting is off by default. Touch  
[Summer Time] to change the setting if you  
are in the summer time period.  
3
Touch [Average Speed].  
The “Average Speed Settings” screen ap-  
pears.  
6
Touch [Time format].  
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
!
12H (default):  
Changes the display to 12-hour format with  
am/pm.  
!
24H:  
Changes the display to 24-hour format.  
162  
En  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
31  
!
Phone Voice  
4
Touch [+] or [–] to set the speed.  
This setting controls the incoming voice vo-  
lume.  
p “Phone Ringtone” and “Phone Voice” ad-  
justments are related to the cellular phone  
featuring Bluetooth technology. No adjust-  
ment is needed when the cellular phone  
featuring Bluetooth technology is not con-  
nected.  
p Volume of the AV source is adjusted by the  
VOL (+/–) button.  
= For details, refer to Checking part names  
and functions on page 12.  
Touch the key next to “Beep”.  
p The estimated time of arrival is not necessa-  
rily estimated based on this speed value.  
5
Touch [OK].  
The settings are completed.  
#
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
ting.  
Setting the Volume for  
Guidance and Phone  
The sound volume for the navigation can be  
set. You can separately set the volume of the  
route guidance and the beep sound.  
!
!
On (default):  
A beep sounds.  
Off:  
The beep sound is muted.  
Touch the key next to “VR Beep”.  
#
Each time you touch the key changes that set-  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” screen on page 161.  
ting.  
!
!
On (default):  
Voice recognition beep is enabled.  
Off:  
2
Touch [Volume].  
Voice recognition beep is disabled.  
The “Volume Settings” screen appears.  
4
To finish the setting, touch [OK].  
3
Touch [+] or [–] to set their volume.  
Changing the preinstalled  
splash screen  
You can change the splash screen to the other  
images preinstalled in the navigation system.  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” screen on page 161.  
On this screen, you can operate the following  
items.  
2
Touch [Splash Screen].  
!
Guidance  
The “Select Splash Screen” screen appears.  
This setting controls the guidance volume  
of navigation.  
3
Touch the image to use as the splash  
p When set to , guidance is output.  
When set to , no guidance is output.  
Phone Ringtone  
screen from the list.  
The image is displayed on the screen.  
!
This setting controls the incoming ring tone  
volume.  
163  
En  
 
Chapter  
31  
Customizing preferences  
4
Touch [OK].  
6
Touch [Select from SD].  
The image is set as the splash screen, and the  
The “Select Splash Screen” screen appears.  
“System Settings” screen returns.  
7
Touch the image to use as the splash  
screen from the list.  
The image is displayed on the screen.  
Changing to the splash screen  
stored in the SD memory card  
8
Touch [OK].  
You can change the splash screen that ap-  
pears when the navigation system starts. Copy  
your chosen image to the SD memory card,  
and select the image to import.  
p Splash screen images should be used with-  
in the following formats;  
The image is set as the splash screen, and the  
“System Settings” screen returns.  
p Images imported from the SD memory card  
are added to the list on “Select Splash  
Screen”.  
— BMP or JPEG files  
Setting for rear view camera  
— Allowable horizontal and vertical size  
are 2 592 pixels x 1 944 pixels or smaller  
— Allowable data size is 6 MB or smaller  
p Proper compatibility with allowable files is  
not guaranteed.  
The following two functions are available. The  
rear view camera feature requires a separately  
sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC4). (For de-  
tails, consult your dealer.)  
p Imported original images will be stored in  
the built-in memory, but the ability to save  
these images cannot be guaranteed com-  
pletely. If your original image data is de-  
leted, insert the SD memory card again  
and re-import the original image.  
p The maximum number of images, includ-  
ing the images in the built-in memory, that  
can be imported and displayed on the list is  
200.  
Rear view camera  
The navigation system features a function that  
automatically switches to the full-screen  
image of the rear view camera installed on  
your vehicle. When the shift lever is in the RE-  
VERSE (R) position, the screen automatically  
switches to full-screen rear view camera  
image.  
Camera for Rear view mode  
“Rear View” can be displayed at all times (e.g.  
when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a  
split screen where map information is partially  
displayed. Please be aware that with this set-  
ting, camera image is not resized to fit, and  
that a portion of what is seen by the camera is  
not viewable.  
1
Create a folder named “Pictures” on the  
top-most directory of the SD memory card  
and store the picture files in this folder.  
2
Store the picture files in the “Pictures”  
folder.  
3
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
= For details, refer to Setting for rear view  
card slot.  
camera on this page.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 15.  
CAUTION  
Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which  
outputs mirror reversed images, otherwise the  
screen image may appear reversed.  
4
5
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” screen on page 161.  
Touch [Splash Screen].  
The “Select Splash Screen” screen appears.  
164  
En  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
31  
p Immediately verify whether the display  
changes to a rear view camera image when  
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R)  
from another position.  
p When the screen changes to full-screen  
rear view camera image during normal  
driving, switch to the opposite setting in  
“Polarity”.  
2
Touch [Screen Calibration].  
A message confirming whether to start the ca-  
libration appears.  
3
Gently touch the center of + mark dis-  
played on the screen.  
The target indicates the order.  
After you touch all marks, the adjusted posi-  
tion data is saved.  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” screen on page 161.  
p Do not turn off the engine while saving the  
adjusted position data.  
#
Press the MODE button.  
Returns to the previous adjustment position.  
Press and hold the MODE button.  
2
Touch [Back Camera].  
#
The “Back Camera Settings” screen appears.  
Cancels the adjustment.  
3
Touch [Camera] change the setting to  
“On”.  
p You can only switch to “Rear View” if this  
Setting the illumination color  
The illumination color can be selected from 10  
different colors. Furthermore, the illumination  
color can be switched between these 10 colors  
in order.  
setting is “On”.  
4
Touch [Battery] or [GND] next to  
“Polarity” to select the appropriate polarity  
setting.  
!
Battery: When the polarity of the con-  
nected lead is positive while the shift lever  
is in the REVERSE (R) position  
Selecting the color from the preset  
colors  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” screen on page 161.  
!
GND: When the polarity of the connected  
lead is negative while the shift lever is in  
the REVERSE (R) position  
2
Touch [Illumi Color].  
The “Illumination Color” screen appears.  
Adjusting the response  
positions of the touch panel  
(touch panel calibration)  
3
Touch the color you want.  
If you feel that the touch panel keys on the  
screen deviate from the actual positions that  
respond to your touch, adjust the response po-  
sitions of the touch panel screen.  
p Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as a  
ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen, which  
could damage the screen.  
Available options:  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” screen on page 161.  
!
Colored keys: Selects the desired preset  
color  
!
Memory 1/Memory 2 : Colors registered in  
the memory  
165  
En  
 
Chapter  
31  
Customizing preferences  
= For details, refer to Creating a user-de-  
fined color and storing it to memory on  
this page.  
Scan: Shifts between the eight default col-  
ors in sequence gradually.  
p An entry cannot be stored with all of the va-  
lues set to “+00”.  
5
Touch [Memory 1] or [Memory 2] to  
store the illumination color.  
!
!
Eco: The colors change in the order of  
white, red, amber, yellow, green, and blue  
as the number of points in the “Eco Score”  
increases.  
6
Touch [OK] to return to the previous  
screen.  
p The illumination lights in white when  
“Eco Score” is set to “Off” or when no  
route is set.  
Checking the version information  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” screen on page 161.  
Creating a user-defined color and  
storing it to memory  
You can create a user-defined color and set it  
as the illumination color.  
2
Touch [Service Information].  
The “Service Information Screen” screen ap-  
pears.  
3
Check the version information.  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” screen on page 161.  
Selecting the video for  
“Rear display”  
p This function is available for AVIC-Z120BT  
only.  
2
Touch [Illumi Color].  
The “Illumination Color” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Custom].  
The “Illumination Color” screen appears.  
p If [Scan] is set, [Custom] cannot be se-  
lected.  
You can choose either to show the same  
image as the front screen or to show the se-  
lected source on the “Rear display”.  
4
Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the values for  
%
Tap  
on the left edge of the screen.  
Red, Green and Blue to create a favorite  
color.  
p The appearance of this key changes accord-  
ing to the current setting.  
Each touch of  
lows:  
changes the settings as fol-  
!
Mirror AV: The video on the front screen of  
the navigation unit is output to the “Rear  
display”  
!
!
!
!
DISC: The video and sound of the DVDs are  
output to the “Rear display”  
iPod: The video and sound of the iPod or  
Pandora are output to the “Rear display”  
AV1: The video and sound of AV1 are out-  
put to the “Rear display”  
Watch the illumination of hardware keys while  
adjusting the color.  
Each time you touch [+] or [–] increases or de-  
creases the value of the selected item. +31 to  
+00 is displayed as the value is increased or  
decreased.  
AV2: The video and sound of AV2 are out-  
put to the “Rear display”  
p When “Mirror AV” is selected, the following  
restrictions are applied to “Rear display”.  
166  
En  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
31  
— When selecting “Rear View” in the map  
display, nothing is displayed.  
2
Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the desired  
item.  
— All sounds cannot be output for “Rear  
display”.  
— When playing back video files on the ex-  
ternal storage device (USB, SD), the  
video image is not output.  
p When “DISC” is selected, the following re-  
striction is applied to “Rear display”.  
— When a CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc is  
set in the built-in DVD drive, only the  
sound is output.  
p When “iPod” is selected, the following re-  
striction is applied to “Rear display”.  
— The video image and sound are output  
only when the appropriate setting on  
“AV1 Input” is “iPod”.  
p When “AV” is selected, the following re-  
strictions are applied to “Rear display”.  
— The video image and sound are output  
only when AV1/AV2 has both video and  
sound.  
!
!
!
!
Brightness: Adjusts the black intensity.  
Contrast: Adjusts the contrast.  
Color: Adjusts the color saturation.  
Color Temp.: Adjusts the tone of color (red  
is emphasized or green is emphasized).  
Dimmer: Adjusts the brightness of display.  
!
p Touching [Camera] switches to the picture  
adjustment screen for the rear view cam-  
era.  
p Touching [Source] while adjusting the rear  
view camera image returns you to the pre-  
vious screen.  
p The adjustments of Brightness and  
Contrast are stored separately when your  
vehicle’s headlights are off (daytime) and  
when your vehicle’s headlights are on  
(nighttime). These are switched automati-  
cally depending on whether the vehicle’s  
headlights are on or off.  
— The video image and sound are output  
only when the appropriate setting on  
“AV1 Input” or “AV2 Input” are  
“Video”.  
Adjusting the picture  
p The adjustments of Dimmer is stored sepa-  
rately when your vehicle’s headlights are off  
(daytime) and when your vehicle’s head-  
lights are on (nighttime). Dimmer is  
switched automatically only when the value  
of nighttime is lower than the value of day-  
time.  
p You cannot adjust Color for the source  
without a video and navigation map display.  
p The setting contents can be memorized se-  
parately for the following screen and the  
video image.  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, you cannot use some of these  
navigation functions while your vehicle is in mo-  
tion. To enable these functions, you must stop in  
a safe place and apply the parking brake. Refer to  
Important Information for the user (a separate  
manual).  
You can adjust the picture for each source and  
rear view camera.  
1
Press and hold the MODE button.  
The “Picture Adjustment” screen appears.  
— AM/FM/CD/ROM/iPod(Music)/Pan-  
dora/SD(audio)/USB(audio)/Bluetooth  
Audio/XM/SIRIUS/Digital Radio screen  
— AV1 and iPod(Video)  
— DVD-V and DivX  
— SD(Video) and USB(Video)  
167  
En  
 
Chapter  
31  
Customizing preferences  
— AV2(Video) and EXT1(Video), EXT2  
(Video)  
4
Touch the item that you want to  
change the setting.  
— Rear view camera image  
— Map screen  
p The picture adjustment may not be avail-  
able with some rear view cameras.  
p Because of the LCD screen characteristics,  
you may not be able to adjust the screen at  
low temperatures.  
3
Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the desired  
p You can only adjust “Wide Mode” when se-  
item.  
lecting an AV source with video.  
Each touch of [+] or [–] increases or decreases  
the level of the desired item.  
#
Touch  
.
Returns the previous screen.  
4
Touch to return to the previous  
screen.  
Setting video input 1 (AV1)  
You can switch this setting according to the  
connected component.  
p This setting applies to mini-jack input.  
Displaying the “AV System  
Settings” screen  
1
Display the “AV System Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Sys-  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
“Top Menu” screen.  
2
Touch [Settings].  
tem Settings” screen on this page.  
2
Touch [AV1 Input].  
Each touch of [AV1 Input] changes the set-  
ting as follows:  
!
iPod: iPod connected with the USB Inter-  
face cable for iPod (CD-IU50V)  
!
!
Video: External video component  
Off: No video component is connected.  
p Use AV1 Input when connecting CD-IU50V  
(sold separately) through the external video  
component.  
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.  
Touch [AV Settings].  
3
Setting video input 2 (AV2)  
You can switch this setting according to the  
connected component.  
p This setting applies to RCA inputs  
(AUDIO INPUT and VIDEO INPUT) on the  
back of the system.  
The “AV System Settings” menu appears.  
168  
En  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
31  
p The same setting is automatically applied  
1
Display the “AV System Settings”  
for the following grouping.  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Sys-  
!
!
!
DVD-V and DivX  
AV1 and AV2  
EXT1 and EXT2  
tem Settings” screen on the previous page.  
2
Touch [AV2 Input].  
p When video is viewed in a wide screen  
mode that does not match its original as-  
pect ratio, it may look strange.  
p Remember that use of this system for com-  
mercial or public viewing purposes may  
constitute an infringement on the author’s  
rights protected by the Copyright Law.  
p The navigation map and the rear view cam-  
era picture is always viewed at Full.  
Each touch of [AV2 Input] changes the set-  
ting as follows:  
!
!
Off: No video component is connected.  
EXT: Pioneer external unit connected with  
the RCA video cable  
!
Video: External video component  
Changing the wide screen mode  
1
Display the “AV System Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Sys-  
Setting the rear output  
The navigation system’s rear output can be  
used for a full-range speaker or subwoofer  
connection. If you switch Rear SP to Sub. W,  
you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to  
a subwoofer without using an auxiliary amp.  
Initially, the navigation system is set for a rear  
full-range speaker connection (Full).  
p Both rear speaker leads output and RCA  
rear output are switched simultaneously in  
this setting. (When you use the product  
without RCA rear output, this setting only  
applies to the rear speaker leads.)  
tem Settings” screen on the previous page.  
2
Touch [Wide Mode].  
Each touch of [Wide Mode] changes the set-  
ting as follows:  
!
Full (full)  
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal  
direction only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3  
TV picture (normal picture) without any  
omissions.  
!
Cinema (cinema)  
A picture is enlarged by the same propor-  
tion as Full or Zoom in the horizontal direc-  
tion and by an intermediate proportion  
between Full and Zoom in the vertical di-  
rection; ideal for a cinema-sized picture  
(wide screen picture) where captions lie  
outside the frame.  
p “Rear SP” can be set only when the source  
is selected to “Off”.  
1
Display the “AV System Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Sys-  
tem Settings” screen on the previous page.  
!
!
Zoom (zoom)  
2
Touch [Rear SP].  
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same pro-  
portion both vertically and horizontally;  
ideal for a cinema-sized picture (wide  
screen picture).  
Each touch of [Rear SP] changes the settings  
as follows:  
!
Full  
When no subwoofer is connected to the  
rear output, select “Full”.  
Sub. W  
Normal (normal)  
A 4:3 picture is displayed normally, giving  
you no sense of disparity since its propor-  
tions are the same as that of the normal  
picture.  
!
When a subwoofer is connected to the rear  
output, select “Sub. W”.  
p Different settings can be stored for each  
video source.  
169  
En  
 
Chapter  
31  
Customizing preferences  
p This menu is not available when AV source  
Switching the muting/  
attenuation timing  
is “Off”.  
You can mute the AV source volume or attenu-  
ate the output signal. This setting is invalid for  
the mute signal that has been received from  
the MUTE lead connected to the navigation  
unit. (Even if this setting is “Off”, the naviga-  
tion system will mute or attenuate the audio  
source volume when the signal is output via  
MUTE lead.)  
1
Display the “AV System Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Sys-  
tem Settings” screen on page 168.  
2
Touch [Mute Level].  
Each touch of [Mute Level] changes the set-  
tings as follows:  
!
!
!
20dB: The volume becomes 1/10.  
10dB: The volume becomes 1/3.  
All: The volume becomes 0.  
1
Display the “AV System Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Sys-  
p When you select “All”, no audio adjust-  
ments are possible during the sound is  
turned off.  
p When you select “20dB” or “10dB”, no  
audio adjustments are possible during the  
sound is attenuated.  
p AV source volume returns to normal when  
the corresponding action is ended.  
p Even when a mute signal has been received  
from MUTE lead connected to the naviga-  
tion unit, navigation voice guidance cannot  
be attenuated or muted.  
tem Settings” screen on page 168.  
2
Touch [Mute].  
Each touch of [Mute] changes the settings as  
follows:  
!
Guide/Tel/VR: The volume is muted or atte-  
nuated according to the following condi-  
tions.  
— When the navigation outputs the gui-  
dance voice.  
— When you use a cellular phone via Blue-  
tooth technology (dialing, talking, in-  
coming call).  
— When the voice recognition mode is ac-  
tivated.  
Acquiring/Cataloging iPod  
music information  
!
!
Tel/VR: The volume is muted or attenuated  
according to the following conditions.  
— When you use a cellular phone via Blue-  
tooth technology (dialing, talking, in-  
coming call).  
If you always set the language other than “Eng-  
lish” on “Voice Language”, this setting is un-  
necessary.  
— When the voice recognition mode is ac-  
tivated.  
Off: The volume does not change.  
Unless “VR Catalog Mode” is turned off, this  
navigation system tries to acquire the informa-  
tion needed to operate iPod with voice com-  
mands. It may take a short period of time to  
transfer the information. Change the setting  
according to your usage.  
p AV source volume returns to normal when  
the corresponding action is ended.  
Switching the muting/  
attenuation level  
You can select the muting/attenuation level of  
“Mute”. This setting is also effective for a  
mute signal that has been received from the  
MUTE lead connected to the navigation unit.  
The navigation system starts acquiring/catalo-  
ging music information (1) when the iPod is  
connected or when the system boots up while  
the iPod is connected and (2) when iPod is the  
selected and displayed AV Source, unless “VR  
Catalog Mode” is turned off.  
170  
En  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
31  
p This function is available when “Change  
Control Mode” is set to “Navi”.  
p If you do not use iPod, this setting is un-  
necessary.  
iPod content should only take a few minutes,  
and will depend on the size of the content  
stored on your iPod. A message will be dis-  
played when cataloging is completed.  
p During transfer, the following iPod opera-  
tions are not available.  
1
Display the “AV System Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Sys-  
— Setting the shuffle play for music  
— Displaying the top category menu  
— Switching the operation screen  
p Once the cataloging is completed, you can  
deactivate “VR Catalog Menu” until you  
update the content/data on iPod. If you up-  
date the iPod data, activate “VR Catalog  
Menu” again to transfer the music infor-  
mation and synchronize the music informa-  
tion for voice commands with the data on  
iPod.  
tem Settings” screen on page 168.  
2
3
Touch [VR Catalog Menu].  
Touch [On] or [Off] to activate or deacti-  
vate “VR Catalog Mode”.  
Touch [Pause].  
#
The cataloging of iPod stops.  
If you want to restart the cataloging of iPod,  
touch [Restart].  
p After you select “Off” in “VR Catalog  
Mode”, the system doesn’t catalog the  
data on the iPod. In such case, the pre-  
viously cataloged data are available as  
voice commands.  
p Once you start the cataloging process, only  
a few basic voice commands can be used  
for iPod until the process has completely  
finished.  
Displaying your DivX VOD  
registration code  
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)  
content on this navigation system, you first  
need to register the unit with your DivX VOD  
content provider. You do this by generating a  
DivX VOD registration code, which you submit  
to your provider.  
p If unreadable characters are included in  
the data on your iPod, names or types may  
not be available as voice commands.  
p This feature is available when the selected  
source is CD, ROM, DivX, or DVD-V.  
Important Notice regarding Voice  
Control for iPods  
1
Display the “AV System Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Sys-  
Voice Control for iPods may be limited if cata-  
loging of iPod content is not completed. Cata-  
loging of iPod content only occurs when the  
system is in “AV Source” mode and the “iPod”  
is the selected and displayed “AV Source”  
screen. Cataloging of iPod content will not  
occur if the system is off, if any other “AV  
Source” is selected (aside from iPod), or if the  
system is in any other mode (aside from “AV  
Source” mode) such as “Destination Menu”,  
“Settings Menu”, “Phone Menu” or the map  
screen. If you wish to use Voice Control for all  
iPod content, it is recommended that you first  
connect your iPod, select “iPod” as the AV  
source, and keep the iPod screen displayed  
until cataloging is completed — cataloging of  
tem Settings” screen on page 168.  
2
Touch [DivX VOD].  
Your 8-digit registration code is displayed.  
p Make a note of the code as you will need it  
when you register with a DivX VOD  
provider.  
Displaying the “AV Sound  
Settings” screen  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
“Top Menu” screen.  
171  
En  
 
Chapter  
31  
Customizing preferences  
2
Touch [Settings].  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
Sound Settings” screen on the previous  
page.  
2
Touch [FAD/BAL].  
When “Sub. W” is selected in “Rear SP”,  
“Balance” will be displayed instead of  
“FAD/BAL” and front/rear speaker balance  
cannot be adjusted.  
= For details, refer to Setting the rear output  
on page 169.  
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.  
Touch [AV Sound].  
3
3
Touch [a] or [b] to adjust front/rear  
speaker balance.  
Each time you touch [a] or [b], the front/rear  
speaker balance moves towards the front or  
the rear.  
“Front:15” to “Rear:15” is displayed as the  
front/rear speaker balance moves from front to  
rear.  
Setting “Front:” and “Rear:” to “0” is correct  
when using a two speaker system.  
The “AV Sound Settings” screen appears.  
p You cannot make adjustments in the follow-  
ing situations:  
— AV source is “Off”.  
— During muting/attenuation  
p You cannot select “SLA” when the FM tuner  
is selected as the AV source.  
4
Touch [c] or [d] to adjust left/right  
speaker balance.  
Each time you touch [c] or [d], the left/right  
speaker balance moves towards the left or the  
right.  
4
Touch the item that you want to  
change the setting.  
“Left:15” to “Right:15” is displayed as the left/  
right speaker balance moves from left to right.  
#
Touch  
.
Returns the previous screen.  
Using the equalizer  
The equalizer lets you adjust equalization to  
match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics  
as desired.  
Using balance adjustment  
You can select a fader/balance setting that  
provides an ideal listening environment in all  
occupied seats.  
172  
En  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
31  
Recalling equalizer curves  
Adjusting the preset equalizer curve  
effect  
You can adjust the effect of the preset equali-  
There are seven stored equalizer curves that  
you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list  
of the equalizer curves:  
zer curves.  
The following equalizer curves can be ad-  
justed:  
Equalizer curve  
!
!
!
!
SuperBass  
Powerful  
Natural  
Vocal  
SuperBass is a curve in which only low-pitched  
sound is boosted.  
Powerful is a curve in which low-pitched and high-  
pitched sounds are boosted.  
Natural is a curve in which low-pitched and high-  
pitched sounds are slightly boosted.  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
Vocal is a curve in which the midrange, which is the  
human vocal range, is boosted.  
Sound Settings” screen on page 171.  
Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.  
2
3
4
Touch [EQ].  
Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-  
ate. A separate custom curve can be created for each  
source.  
Touch the equalizer you want.  
Touch [+] or [–] next to “Nuance”.  
p The level can be adjusted in the range of –6  
to +6.  
p If “Natural” is selected, the level can be ad-  
justed in the range of –4 to +6.  
Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-  
ate. If you select this curve, the effect is reflected all  
AV source.  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
Adjusting the equalizer curves  
Sound Settings” screen on page 171.  
You can adjust the currently selected equalizer  
curve setting as desired. Adjustments can be  
made with a 7-band graphic equalizer.  
2
Touch [EQ].  
The difference between “Custom1” and  
“Custom2”  
!
A separate Custom1 curve can be created  
for each source. If you make adjustments  
when a curve SuperBass, Powerful,  
Natural, Vocal, Flat, or Custom1 is se-  
lected, the equalizer curve settings will be  
memorized in Custom1.  
3
Touch the equalizer you want.  
!
!
A Custom2 curve can be created common  
to all sources. If you make adjustments  
when Custom2 curve is selected, the Cus-  
tom2 curve will be updated.  
The adjusted Custom1 curve is memorized  
for each of the source selected, but one  
curve is shared for the following sources.  
— CD, ROM, DVD-V, and DivX  
— AM and FM  
— EXT1 and EXT2  
173  
En  
Chapter  
31  
Customizing preferences  
— AV1 and AV2  
2
Touch [Loudness].  
— SD and USB  
The different source volume level can be  
set between iPod and USB.  
Each time you touch [Loudness], the level is  
selected in the following order:  
Off — Low — Mid — High  
!
!
When “Flat” is selected, no supplement or  
correction is made to the sound. This is  
useful to check the effect of the equalizer  
curves by switching alternatively between  
“Flat” and a set equalizer curve.  
Using subwoofer output  
The navigation system is equipped with a sub-  
woofer output mechanism, which can be  
turned on or off.  
p This function is not available when “Sub  
Woofer” is “Off”.  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
Sound Settings” screen on page 171.  
2
3
Touch [EQ].  
Sound Settings” screen on page 171.  
Touch one of the keys to select a curve  
that you want to use as the basis of custo-  
mizing.  
2
Touch [Sub Woofer].  
3
on.  
Touch [On] to turn subwoofer output  
4
Touch [Customize].  
To turn subwoofer output off, touch [Off].  
5
Touch the frequency that you want to  
adjust the level.  
4
Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select  
the phase of subwoofer output.  
6
Touch [a] or [b] to adjust the level of  
the equalizer band.  
Each time you touch [a] or [b], the level of  
the equalizer band increases or decreases.  
5
Touch [+] or [–] next to “Level” to adjust  
the output level.  
“+6” to “–24” is displayed as the level is in-  
creased or decreased.  
Adjusting loudness  
6
Touch [c] or [d] next to  
Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the  
low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.  
“Frequency(Hz)” to select cut-off fre-  
quency.  
Each time you touch [c] or [d], cut-off fre-  
quencies are selected in the following order:  
50Hz — 63Hz — 80Hz — 100Hz — 125Hz  
Only frequencies lower than those in the se-  
lected range are output from the subwoofer.  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
Sound Settings” screen on page 171.  
174  
En  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
Using the high pass filter  
When you do not want low sounds from the  
subwoofer output frequency range to play  
from the front or rear speakers, activate HPF  
(high pass filter). Only frequencies higher than  
those in the selected range are output from  
the front or rear speakers.  
31  
p The different source volume level can be set  
between iPod and USB.  
Enhancing bass (Bass Booster)  
You can enhance bass sounds that are often  
muted by driving noise.  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
Sound Settings” screen on page 171.  
Sound Settings” screen on page 171.  
2
3
Touch [Bass Booster].  
2
Touch [HPF].  
Each time you touch [HPF] selects cut-off fre-  
quencies in the following order:  
Off — 50Hz — 63Hz — 80Hz — 100Hz —  
125Hz  
Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the range from  
0 to 6.  
Setting the simulated sound stage  
You can select the desired effect from various  
simulated sound stages, such as Music Studio  
or Dynamic Theater. You can also adjust a lis-  
tener positioning effect.  
Adjusting source levels  
SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust  
the volume level of each source to prevent ra-  
dical changes in volume when switching be-  
tween sources.  
p Settings are based on the FM tuner volume  
level, which remains unchanged.  
Setting a stage that fits your image  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
1
Compare the FM tuner volume level  
with the level of the source you wish to ad-  
just.  
Sound Settings” screen on page 171.  
2
3
Touch [Staging].  
2
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
Touch desired stage setting.  
Sound Settings” screen on page 171.  
3
4
Touch [SLA].  
Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the source vo-  
lume.  
“+8dB” to “–8dB” is displayed as the source  
volume is increased or decreased.  
The following AV sources are set to the same  
source level adjustment volume automatically.  
p “Living Room” setting that emphasizes  
mid-range sound hardly has any effect near  
the maximum volume level.  
p When you set staging to an option other  
than “Off”, the high pass filter (HPF) setting  
turns “Off”.  
!
!
!
!
CD, ROM, DivX  
SD and USB  
AV1 and AV2  
EXT1 and EXT2  
175  
En  
 
Chapter  
31  
Customizing preferences  
= For details, refer to Using the high pass filter  
5
Touch [Setting Replicator].  
on the previous page.  
A message confirming whether to update the  
settings appears.  
Adjusting a position effect  
6
Touch [Yes].  
You can select a listener position that you  
want to make as the center of sound effects.  
Update starts.  
After the settings are updated, a message con-  
firming whether to restart the navigation sys-  
tem appears.  
1
Display the “AV Sound Settings”  
screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “AV  
7
Touch [OK].  
Sound Settings” screen on page 171.  
The navigation system restarts.  
2
3
4
Touch [Staging].  
Touch [Position].  
Touch desired position.  
Replicating the settings  
You can import settings you have made on the  
utility program AVIC FEEDS which is available  
separately to the navigation system.  
1
Use AVIC FEEDS to replicate the set-  
tings and store them on an SD memory  
card.  
2
Insert an SD memory card into the SD  
card slot.  
= For details of the operation, refer to Insert-  
ing and ejecting an SD memory card on  
page 15.  
3
Press the HOME button to display the  
“Top Menu” screen.  
4
Touch [Settings].  
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.  
176  
En  
 
Chapter  
Customizing preferences  
Turning off the screen  
31  
By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,  
you can turn off the screen display without  
turning off the voice guidance.  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
“Top Menu” screen.  
2
Touch [Settings].  
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.  
3
Touch [Screen Off].  
The screen is turned off.  
p Touch anywhere on the screen to turn it  
back on.  
177  
En  
 
Chapter  
32  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
To Ensure Safe Driving  
!
!
!
Switch the screen to map screen or AV op-  
eration screen.  
CAUTION  
For your safety, avoid viewing the screen in the  
voice operation as much as possible while  
driving.  
j
Press the  
ations.  
button to activate voice oper-  
If you use voice operation, select [English] in  
[Voice Language] of “Regional Settings”. If  
you select other languages, voice operation  
will not be available.  
j
Speak a command into the microphone  
after the beep.  
When the command is recognized, the na-  
vigation system displays next options on  
the screen, and pronounces it in some  
cases.  
Basics of Voice Operation  
j
Your Pioneer navigation system uses the latest  
in voice recognition technology. You can use  
voice commands to operate many of its func-  
tions. This chapter describes where you can  
use voice commands, and also what com-  
mands the system accepts.  
!
!
Repeat previous step as necessary.  
j
The requested operation will be carried out.  
p The voice operation may not be operable for a  
minute after the navigation system has booted  
up.  
p This function is not available while the cata-  
loging of iPod is created.  
p Voice operation will be activated 30 seconds  
after the map screen is displayed.  
Flow of voice operation  
If the  
button does not respond, display  
You can start voice operation any time even  
when the map screen is displayed or AV is op-  
erating. (Some operations are not available.)  
The basic steps of voice operations are as  
follows.  
the disclaimer screen and then touch [OK].  
The map screen is displayed.  
Starting voice operation  
%
Press the  
button when the map  
screen or the AV operation screen is dis-  
played.  
The voice operation screen appears.  
1
2
3
4
178  
En  
 
Chapter  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
32  
1 Voice help menu:  
4
Say “Find an address”.  
Displays a list of commands for voice oper-  
ation.  
A message prompting the next operation is  
given.  
2 Voice operation condition indicator:  
5
Say the state name that you want to  
When  
is indicated, the navigation sys-  
set to your destination.  
tem can recognize your voice commands.  
:
You can listen to the brief operating in-  
struction.  
3
4
6
Say the city name that you want to set  
to your destination.  
:
7
Say the street name that you want to  
cancels voice operation.  
set to your destination.  
You can cancel the voice operation feature  
at any time by saying “Cancel”. After you  
cancel voice operations, the display returns  
to the screen displayed before the voice op-  
eration screen appeared.  
8
Say the house number that you want  
to set to your destination.  
Your navigation system sets the route to your  
destination, and the map of your surroundings  
appears.  
#
If you say “Just go there” , the navigation sys-  
How to use the voice operation  
Searching for a location by address  
tem sets the route to the representative location  
of the city or the street.  
In this example, you want to search for a loca-  
tion by address and set it as your destination.  
p When the list of candidates with number  
appears, say the number that you want to  
select.  
Search for POI in vicinity  
In this example, you want to search for a POI  
and set it as your destination.  
p When the list of candidates with number  
appears, say the number that you want to  
select.  
When you select the entry next to “1”, say  
“Number One”.  
p If there are multiple items that correspond  
to the name you gave, the list screen ap-  
pears. In this case, touch the item you want  
to select from the list.  
When you select the entry next to “1”, say  
“Number One”.  
p If there are multiple items that correspond  
to the name you gave, the list screen ap-  
pears. In this case, touch the item you want  
to select from the list.  
1
Press the MODE button to display the  
map screen or the AV operation screen.  
1
Press the MODE button to display the  
2
Press the button to activate voice  
map screen or the AV operation screen.  
operations.  
A list of commands for voice operation ap-  
pears. After a message, the beep indicates  
that the system is ready to accept your voice  
command. Say a command after this beep.  
2
Press the button to activate voice  
operations.  
A list of commands for voice operation ap-  
pears. After a message, the beep indicates  
that the system is ready to accept your voice  
command. Say a command after this beep.  
3
Say “I need directions”.  
A message prompting you to select a search  
by address or by POI appears.  
3
Say “I need directions”.  
A message prompting you to select a search  
by address or by POI appears.  
179  
En  
 
Chapter  
32  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
4
Say “Point of interest”.  
3
Say “iPod” on the selection screen to  
The list of POI categories appears.  
switch the AV source to iPod.  
p Touching the item on the screen also en-  
ables you to select the desired AV source.  
5
Say the category that you want to set  
to your destination.  
The list of candidates with number appears.  
4
Press the  
button to activate voice  
operations.  
6
Say the number that you want to  
select.  
5
Say “Play the album Pioneer” to play-  
Your navigation system sets the route to your  
destination, and the map of your surroundings  
appears.  
back the album name “Pioneer”.  
If the command is recognized properly, play-  
back starts from the first song of “Pioneer”.  
Calling the entry on “Contacts”  
A method for dialing the entry named “Nancy”  
is described here along with an operational ex-  
ample.  
1
Press the  
button to activate voice  
operations.  
2
Say “Call Nancy” to make a call.  
A message confirming whether to dial appear-  
s.  
3
Say “Yes”.  
Dialing starts.  
Operating iPod by voice  
You can play music using voice operation from  
the iPod connected to the navigation system.  
p To use the content/data on the iPod for  
voice operation, transfer the data to this  
system first.  
= For details, refer to Acquiring/Cataloging  
iPod music information on page 170.  
Examples of voice operation of the iPod are  
shown below. (A method for playing the album  
title named “Pioneer” is described here, along  
with an operational example.)  
1
Press the  
button to activate voice  
operations.  
2
Say “Change Source” to display the AV  
source selection screen.  
180  
En  
Chapter  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
32  
Available Basic Voice Commands  
The navigation system can also recognize the words in the following list.  
p
Terms written in italics are voice commands.  
Basic commands  
Voice commands and operations  
Back d The previous screen returns.  
Cancel d Cancels the voice operation.  
Help d Outputs the brief operating instruction by voice.  
Next page, Previous page d Switches the page.  
Last page, First page d Switches to the last or first page.  
Voice operation for the iPod  
For <Artist name>, <Album name>, <Playlist name>, <Genre name> shown on the following chart, say the  
name their name in the iPod.  
p
Playback of iPod movies is not available using voice commands.  
Voice commands and operations  
Shuffle play d Plays all songs randomly.  
Resume d Resumes the song or the video currently playing .  
Pause d Pauses the song or the video currently playing .  
Next song d Plays the next song.  
Previous song d Plays the previous song or return to the beginning of the song currently playing.  
Play songs d Starts playback from the top of “Songs”.  
Play artists d Displays the artist list d Say the artist name that you want to play.  
Play the artist <Artist name> d Starts playback from the top of the selected artist.  
Play albums d Displays the album list d Say the album name that you want to play.  
Play the album <Album name> d Starts playback from the top of the selected album.  
Play playlists d Displays the playlist d Say the playlist that you want to play.  
Play the playlist <Playlist name> d Starts playback from the top of the selected playlist.  
Play genres d Displays the genre list d Say the genre that you want to play.  
Play the genre <Genre name> d Starts playback from the top of the selected genre.  
Browse artists d Displays the artist list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired  
voice commands.  
Browse the artist <Artist name> d Displays the album list of the selected artist together with sub-screen to con-  
tinue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands.  
Browse albums d Displays the album list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the de-  
sired voice commands.  
Browse the album <Album name> d Displays the song list of the selected album together with sub-screen to con-  
tinue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands.  
181  
En  
 
Chapter  
32  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
Voice commands and operations  
Browse playlists d Displays the playlist together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired  
voice commands.  
Browse the playlist <Playlist name> d Displays the song list of the selected playlist together with sub-screen to  
continue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands.  
Browse genre d Displays the genre list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. d Say the desired  
voice commands.  
Browse the genre <Genre name> d Displays the song list of the selected genre list together with sub-screen to con-  
tinue the voice operation. d Say the desired voice commands.  
Play more music artist d Plays the songs related to the currently playing artist.  
Play more music album d Plays the songs related to the currently playing album.  
Play more music genre d Plays the songs related to the currently playing genre.  
Next page, Previous page d Displays the previous or next page of the selection list. (*1)  
First page, Last page d Displays the first or last page of the the selection list. (*1)  
(*1) The voice commands is available only when the selection list is displayed.  
Voice operation for AV source (other than iPod)  
AV source selection  
Voice commands and operations  
Change Source to DISC d Switches the AV source to Disc.  
Change Source to FM d Switches the AV source to FM.  
Change Source to AM d Switches the AV source to AM.  
Change Source to XM Satellite Radio d Switches the AV source to XM.  
Change Source to SIRIUS Satellite Radio d Switches the AV source to SIRIUS.  
Change Source to HD Radio d Switches the AV source to Digital Radio.  
Change Source to SD Media d Switches the AV source to SD.  
Change Source to USB d Switches the AV source to USB.  
Change Source to iPod d Switches the AV source to iPod.  
Change Source to Bluetooth Audio d Switches the AV source to Audio.  
Built-in DVD drive, external storage device (USB, SD)  
Voice commands and operations  
Shuffle play d Plays all songs randomly.  
Pause d Pauses the track or file currently playing.  
Resume d Resumes the track or file currently playing.  
Next song d Plays the next track or file.  
Previous song d Plays the previous track or file, or returns to the beginning of the track or file currently playing.  
182  
En  
 
Chapter  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
Voice commands related to hands-free phoning  
32  
p
You can make a phone call by voice dialing if the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is being  
paired with the navigation system.  
p
p
For <entry’s name> shown on the following chart, say the name of the entry stored in “Contacts”.  
For <phone number> shown on the following chart, say the desired phone number.  
Voice commands and operations  
Call <entry’s name> d Makes a call to the entry (*2).  
Call <entry’s name> general d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the general  
phone number of the entry (*3).  
Call <entry’s name> mobile d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the cellular  
phone number of the entry (*3).  
Call <entry’s name> home d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the home  
phone number of the entry (*3).  
Call <entry’s name> work d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the office phone  
number of the entry (*3).  
Call <entry’s name> other d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the other phone  
number of the entry (*3).  
Call <phone number> d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say Yes d Dials the phone number.  
Make a call d Say the phone number you want to call d Displays the message confirming whether to dial d Say  
Yes d The system starts dialing to the number.  
Make a call d Say the name of entry stored on “Contacts” you want to call d Displays the message confirming  
whether to dial d Say Yes d The system starts dialing to the number (*2).  
List outgoing calls d Display the list of recent outgoing calls (“Dialed Calls”) to select the number and call (*4).  
List recent calls d Incoming calls d Display the list of recently received calls (“Received Calls”) to select the num-  
ber and call (*4).  
List recent calls d Outgoing calls d Display the list of recent outgoing calls (“Dialed Calls”) to select the number  
and call (*4).  
List recent incoming calls d Display the list of recently received calls (“Received Calls”) to select the number and  
call (*4).  
Find the nearest d Displays the category list d Say the category that you want to set to your destination d Displays  
the list of candidates with number d Show me details for <the number that you want to select> d Call d Dialing  
starts.  
(*2) If the entry has multiple phone number data, selection list may appear. In such case, say the type of phone  
number.  
(*3) If there is no corresponding type on the entry, the system may suggest you other phone numbers of the entry. In  
such case, say the type of phone number.  
(*4) Touching the item on the screen also enables you to select the desired list.  
183  
En  
 
Chapter  
32  
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice  
Tips for Voice Operation  
For your voice commands to be correctly re-  
cognized and interpreted, ensure that condi-  
tions are suitable for recognition.  
Close the vehicle windows  
Please note that wind through the vehicle win-  
dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the  
vehicle can interfere with voice operation.  
Position the microphone carefully  
For optimum pick-up, the microphone should  
be fixed at a suitable distance directly in front  
of the driver.  
Pause before giving a command  
Speaking too soon may cause the recognition  
to fail.  
Pronounce your commands carefully  
Speak slowly, deliberately, and clearly.  
184  
En  
 
Chapter  
Other functions  
33  
Entering the password  
Setting the anti-theft function  
On the password input screen, you must enter  
the current password. If you enter an incorrect  
password three times, the screen is locked  
and operations using touch panel keys are dis-  
abled.  
You can set a password for the navigation sys-  
tem. If the back-up lead is cut after the pass-  
word is set, the navigation system prompts for  
the password at the time of next boot up.  
1
Enter the password.  
Setting the password  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
2
Touch [OK].  
“Top Menu” screen.  
The message “The unit has been locked be-  
cause an invalid password was entered  
three times. Turn ACC off and on, and  
enter your password.” appears if you entered  
the correct password and the navigation sys-  
tem is unlocking.  
2
Touch [Settings].  
The “Settings Menu” screen appears.  
p This can also be operated using the “Short-  
cut Menu” screen.  
3
Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and  
then touch and hold Area3.  
Deleting the password  
The current password can be deleted.  
Area1  
Area2  
Area3  
1
Press the HOME button to display the  
“Top Menu” screen.  
2
3
Touch [Settings] on the “Top Menu”.  
Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and  
then touch and hold Area3.  
4
Touch [Clear password].  
4
Touch [Set Password].  
The password setting screen appears.  
The password setting screen appears.  
5
6
7
Enter the current password.  
Touch [OK].  
5
Enter the password you want to set.  
p 5 to 16 characters can be entered for a  
password.  
Touch [Yes].  
6
7
Touch [OK].  
The message for deletion appears and then  
the current password is deleted.  
Reenter the password to confirm the  
setting.  
Forgotten password  
Contact the nearest authorized Pioneer Ser-  
vice Station.  
8
Touch [OK].  
Password protection is applied.  
p If you want to change the password cur-  
rently set, enter the current password and  
then enter the new one.  
185  
En  
 
Chapter  
33  
Other functions  
Returning the navigation  
system to the default or  
factory settings  
You can return settings or recorded content to  
the default or factory settings. There are some  
methods to clear user data, and the situations  
and the cleared content are different for each  
method. For information regarding the content  
that is cleared by each method, see the list  
presented later.  
Method 1: Remove the vehicle battery  
This transforms the system into the same  
state as when the navigation system is unin-  
stalled.  
Method 2: Restore Factory Settings  
This clears some items in the “Navi Settings”  
menu.  
= For details, refer to Restore Factory Set-  
tings on page 188.  
Method 3: Touch [Clear user information]  
on the “Select Items to Reset” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Select  
Items to Reset” screen on page 188.  
Method 4: Touch [Reset] on the “Select  
Items to Reset” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “Select  
Items to Reset” screen on page 188.  
186  
En  
 
Chapter  
Other functions  
33  
Setting items to be deleted  
The items to be deleted vary depending on the  
reset method. The items listed in the following  
table return to the default or factory settings.  
p Almost all items not listed below will be re-  
tained. However, some of the items to be re-  
turned to their default values are not listed  
if the setting value can be easily recovered  
by user, such as the last map scale, the last  
status of AV operation screen, etc.  
— : The setting will be retained.  
1: The setting will be cleared and returned to  
the default or factory settings.  
Navigation functions  
Method 1  
Method 2  
Method 3  
Method 4  
View mode and scale setting on  
the map  
—
—
—
1
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Map function  
Direction of the map  
Last cursor position on the map  
screen  
Current route  
—
—
Guidance state of the current  
route  
—
Route Setting  
Others  
Vehicle position information  
Options  
—
—
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Keyboard  
Learnt data used in Learning  
Route  
1
—
1
1
Point registered in Favorites  
History  
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
—
—
—
1
1
1
1
1
—
1
1
1
1
1
—
—
1
1
—
—
1
—
1
1
Destination  
View Mode  
Map Settings  
Other settings  
3D Calibration Status  
Drive Log Settings  
Demo Mode  
—
—
1
Navi Settings  
Set Home  
—
—
—
—
—
1
Modify Current Location  
Other settings  
187  
En  
 
Chapter  
33  
Other functions  
Navigation functions  
Method 1  
Method 2  
Method 3  
Method 4  
Program Language, Voice  
Language  
—
—
1
1
Time  
—
1
—
—
1
1
—
1
1
—
1
System Settings  
Back Camera  
Other settings  
—
Bluetooth Set-  
tings  
All settings (*1)  
—
1
1
1
Phone Menu  
All settings (*1)  
—
—
1
1
1
Other functions  
Anti-theft password  
—
—
—
(*1) All stored data of 5 users is deleted.  
AV functions  
Method 1  
Method 2  
Method 3  
Method 4  
Volume  
1
—
—
—
Wide Mode, Mute, VR Cata-  
log Menu  
—
1
1
1
AV Settings  
AV Sound  
Other settings  
All settings  
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
CD, ROM, DVD-V,  
DivX, FM, AM,  
Audio  
All settings (*2)  
1
—
—
—
SD, USB  
All settings (*2)  
Picture Adjustment  
Tilt  
1
1
1
—
—
—
1
—
—
—
—
—
Other functions  
(*2) All settings including the setting on the “Function” menu are deleted.  
Restore Factory Settings  
p Be sure to read “Setting items to be deleted”  
Displaying the “Select Items to  
Reset” screen  
p Be sure to read “Setting items to be deleted”  
before you perform this operation.  
before you perform this operation.  
1
Display the “System Settings” screen.  
= For details, refer to Displaying the “System  
Settings” screen on page 161.  
1
Park your vehicle in a safe place and  
apply the parking brake.  
2
Touch [Restore Factory Settings].  
2
on.  
Turn the ignition switch off and back  
The message confirming whether to restore  
the settings appears.  
The navigation system restarts, and the splash  
screen appears.  
3
Touch [Yes].  
188  
En  
 
Chapter  
Other functions  
33  
3
Press and hold the MODE button and  
the TRK (c) button while splash screen ap-  
pears.  
p For users of AVIC-Z120BT, press the MODE  
button and the TRK (m) button.  
The “Select Items to Reset” screen appears.  
4
Touch [Clear user information] or  
[Reset].  
The message confirming whether to erase the  
data appears.  
5
Touch [Yes].  
The recorded contents are cleared.  
189  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Troubleshooting  
If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common  
problems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. If a solution to your problem  
cannot be found here, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.  
Problems with the navigation screen  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
The power doesn’t turn on. The Leads and connectors are incor-  
navigation system doesn’t oper- rectly connected.  
Confirm once more that all connections are  
correct.  
ate.  
The fuse is blown.  
Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then  
replace the fuse. Be very sure to install a cor-  
rect fuse with the same rating.  
Noise and other factors are causing Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off  
the built-in microprocessor to oper- the engine. Turn the ignition key back to Acc  
ate incorrectly.  
off. Then start the engine again, and turn the  
power to the navigation system back on.  
You cannot position your vehicle The GPS antenna is in an unsuitable The quality of signals from the GPS satellites  
on the map without a significant location.  
positioning error.  
is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-  
racy. Check the GPS signal reception and the  
position of the GPS antenna if necessary.  
Obstacles are blocking signals from The quality of signals from the GPS satellites  
the satellites.  
is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-  
racy. Check the GPS signal reception and the  
position of the GPS antenna if necessary, or  
continue driving until reception improves.  
Keep the antenna clear.  
The position of satellites relative to The quality of signals from the GPS satellites  
your vehicle is inadequate.  
is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-  
racy. Continue driving until reception im-  
proves.  
Signals from the GPS satellites have The quality of signals from the GPS satellites  
been modified to reduce accuracy. is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-  
(GPS satellites are operated by the racy. Wait until reception improves.  
US Department of Defense, and the  
US government reserves the right to  
distort positioning data for military  
reasons. This may lead to greater  
positioning errors.)  
If a vehicle phone or cellular phone The quality of signals from the GPS satellites  
is used near the GPS antenna, GPS is poor, causing reduced positioning accu-  
reception may be lost temporarily.  
racy. When using a cellular phone, keep the  
antenna of the cellular phone away from the  
GPS antenna.  
190  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
You cannot position your vehicle Something covers the GPS antenna. Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray  
on the map without a significant  
positioning error.  
paint or vehicle wax, because this may block  
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup  
can also degrade the signals.  
Signals from the vehicle’s speed  
Check that the cables are properly connected.  
pulse are not being picked up prop- If necessary, consult the dealer that installed  
erly.  
the system.  
The navigation system may not be  
mounted securely in your vehicle.  
Check that the navigation system is securely  
mounted and, if necessary, consult the dealer  
that installed the system.  
The navigation system is installed  
with an extreme angle exceeding  
the installation angle limitations.  
Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-  
tion system must be installed within the al-  
lowed installation angle. For details, refer to  
Installation Manual.)  
Indication of the position of your ve- Check whether or not the reverse gear signal  
hicle is misaligned after a U-turn or input lead (violet) is connected properly. (The  
reversing.  
navigation system works properly without the  
lead connected, but positioning accuracy will  
be adversely affected.)  
“Eco Graph” is not available.  
The navigation system is unable to Drive about 6 miles (10 km) on a road without  
obtain past average fuel mileage obstructions. Then park your vehicle in a safe  
data, so “Eco Graph” cannot be dis- place, turn off the navigation system and turn  
played.  
the power to the navigation system back on.  
The map color does not switch “Day/Night Display” is set to  
automatically between daytime “Day”.  
and nighttime.  
Check “Day/Night Display” setting and  
make sure “Automatic” is selected. (Page  
159)  
The orange/white lead is not con-  
nected.  
Check the connection.  
The screen is too bright.  
The display is very dim.  
Picture quality adjustment of the  
display is not correct.  
Adjust the picture quality. (Page 167)  
The vehicle’s light is turned ON, and Read about “Day/Night Display” setting  
“Automatic” is selected on “Day/  
and, if desired, select “Day”. (Page 159)  
Night Display”.  
Picture quality adjustment of the  
display is not correct.  
Adjust the picture quality. (Page 167)  
No sounds of AV source are pro- The volume level is low.  
Adjust the volume level.  
Turn the attenuator or mute off.  
Check the connection.  
duced.  
The attenuator or mute is on.  
The volume level will not rise.  
A speaker lead is disconnected.  
The volume of navigation gui-  
VOL (+/–) button is used to adjust  
Turn the volume up or down using [Volume]  
dance and beeps cannot be ad- the volume.  
justed.  
on the “System Settings” menu. (Page 163)  
The person on the other end of The voice from the person on the  
Use the following methods to reduce the  
the phone call cannot hear the other end of the phone call is output echo:  
conversation due to an echo. from the speakers and then picked —Lower the volume on the receiver  
up by the microphone again, creat- —Have both parties pause slightly before  
ing an echo. speaking  
191  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
There’s no picture.  
The parking brake cord is not con-  
nected.  
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply  
the parking brake.  
The parking brake is not applied.  
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply  
the parking brake.  
The backlight of the LCD panel is  
turned off.  
Turn on the backlight. (Page 177)  
Rear display picture disappears. The source disc being listened to in Before ejecting the disc, switch the source.  
the navigation system has been  
ejected.  
This problem may occur when certain con-  
nection methods are used.  
There is a problem with the “Rear  
display”, for example a faulty wiring  
connection.  
Check the “Rear display” and its connection.  
An AV source that cannot output to Select an appropriate AV source.  
the rear display is selected.  
Nothing is displayed and the  
touch panel keys cannot be  
used.  
The setting for the rear view camera Select the appropriate setting for the rear  
is incorrect.  
view camera.  
The shift lever was placed in [R]  
Select the correct polarity setting for “Back  
when the rear view camera was not Camera”. (Page 164)  
connected.  
There is no response when the The touch panel keys deviate from  
touch panel keys are touched, or the actual positions that respond to  
Perform touch panel calibration. (Page 165)  
a different key responds.  
your touch for some reason.  
The external storage device  
(USB, SD) cannot be used.  
The USB storage device has been  
removed immediately after plugging the engine. Turn the ignition key back to Acc  
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off  
it.  
off. Then start the engine again, and turn the  
power to the navigation system back on.  
Problems in the AV screen  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
CD or DVD playback is not pos- The disc is inserted upside down.  
Insert the disc with the label upward.  
Clean the disc.  
sible.  
The disc is dirty.  
The disc is cracked or otherwise da- Insert a normal, round disc.  
maged.  
The files on the disc are an irregular Check the file format.  
file format.  
The disc format cannot be played  
back.  
Replace the disc.  
The loaded disc is a type this system Check what type of disc it is. (Page 205)  
cannot play.  
The screen is covered by a cau- The parking brake lead is not con-  
Connect the parking brake lead correctly, and  
apply the parking brake.  
tion message and the video can- nected or applied.  
not be shown.  
The parking brake interlock is acti- Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply  
vated.  
the parking brake.  
192  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Symptom  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
No video output from connected “AV1 Input” or “AV2 Input” setting Correct the settings. (Page 145)  
equipment.  
is incorrect.  
No video output from connected  
iPod.  
The connection of the USB interface Connect both the USB plug and the RCA  
cable for iPod is incorrect.  
cable side. (If only one of these connection  
has been made, the iPod will not work prop-  
erly.) (Page 19)  
The audio or video skips.  
The navigation system is not firmly Secure the navigation system firmly.  
secured.  
No sounds are produced.  
Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.  
The volume level will not rise.  
The system is performing still, slow There is no sound during still, slow motion, or  
motion, or frame-by-frame playback frame-by-frame playback with DVD-Video.  
with DVD-Video.  
The system is paused or performing, For the media other than music CD (CD-DA),  
fast reverse or forward during the  
disc playback.  
there is no sound on fast reverse or forward.  
The icon 9 is displayed, and op- The operation is not compatible  
eration is not possible. with the video configuration.  
This operation is not possible. (For example,  
the DVD playing does not feature that angle,  
audio system, subtitle language, etc.)  
The picture stops (pauses) and The reading of data is impossible  
the navigation system cannot be during disc playback.  
operated.  
After touching g once, start playback once  
more.  
The picture is stretched, with in- The aspect setting is incorrect for  
Select the appropriate setting for that image.  
(Page 169, Page 107)  
correct aspect ratio.  
the display.  
A parental lock message is dis- Parental lock is on.  
played and DVD playback is not  
possible.  
Turn parental lock off or change the level.  
(Page 108)  
Parental lock for DVD playback The code number is incorrect.  
cannot be canceled.  
Input the correct code number. (Page 108)  
Playback is not with the audio  
language and subtitle language dialog or subtitles in the language  
settings selected in “DVD/  
DivX® Setup”.  
The DVD playing does not feature  
Switching to a selected language is not possi-  
ble if the language selected in “DVD/DivX®  
Setup” is not recorded on the disc. (Page  
107)  
selected in “DVD/DivX® Setup”.  
The picture is extremely unclear/ The disc features a signal to prohibit Since the navigation system is compatible  
distorted and dark during play- copying. (Some discs may have  
with the copy guard analog copy protect sys-  
tem, the picture may suffer from horizontal  
stripes or other imperfections when a disc  
with that kind of protection signal is viewed  
on some displays. This does not mean the na-  
vigation system is malfunctioning.  
back.  
this.)  
iPod cannot be operated.  
The iPod is frozen.  
! Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface  
cable for iPod.  
! Update the iPod software version.  
An error has occurred.  
! Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface  
cable for iPod.  
! Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn  
off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to  
Acc off. Then start the engine again, and turn  
the power to the navigation system back on.  
! Update the iPod software version.  
193  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Problems with the phone screen  
Symptom Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Dialing is not possible because Your phone is out of range for ser-  
the touch panel keys for dialing vice.  
are inactive.  
Retry after re-entering the range for service.  
The connection between the cellular Perform the connection process.  
phone and the navigation system  
cannot be established now.  
If the screen becomes frozen...  
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off  
the engine. Turn the ignition key back to Acc  
off. Then start the engine again, and turn the  
power to the navigation system back on.  
194  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Messages and how to react to them  
The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system. Refer to the table below to  
identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action.  
There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here. In such a  
case, follow the instructions given on the display.  
Messages for navigation functions  
Message  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
System detected improper  
connection of Parking Brake  
lead. Please check your con-  
figuration for safety. Please  
see Operation Manual for  
more information regarding  
safe operation.  
Parking brake lead is incorrectly  
connected.  
Confirm once more that their connections are  
correct.  
Route calculation was not  
possible.  
Route calculation has failed be-  
cause of a malfunction in map data, ! Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-  
! Change the destination.  
software, or hardware.  
sage persists.  
Route calculation not possi-  
ble. Destination too far.  
The destination is too far.  
Set a destination closer to the starting point.  
Route calculation not possi-  
ble. Destination too close.  
The destination is too close.  
Set a destination farther from the starting  
point.  
Route calculation not possi-  
ble. Navigation cannot be  
The destination, waypoint(s), or  
starting point are in an area where ! Reset the destination after you drive the ve-  
! Set a destination and waypoint(s) on roads.  
provided around destination no road exists (e.g. a mountain) and hicle to any road.  
or starting point.  
the route calculation is impossible.  
Route to destination cannot  
be calculated.  
The destination or waypoint(s) are in Change the destination.  
an isolated island, etc. without a  
ferry and the route calculation is im-  
possible. If there is no road con-  
nected to your starting point or  
destination, this message will ap-  
pear.  
Failed to create route profile In rare cases, a route calculation  
! Retry.  
error may occur.  
! Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if this mes-  
sage persists.  
No picture folder. Save jpeg  
file to /Pictures/ folder  
Cannot load the image because  
“Pictures” folder is not found in the (Page 164)  
Use appropriate data and store it correctly.  
inserted external storage device.  
“Pictures” folder exists on the SD  
memory card but there is no load-  
able data in the folder.  
Use appropriate data and store it correctly.  
(Page 164)  
Data Read error.  
The file is corrupt  
Failed to read the data for some rea- Use appropriate data and store it correctly.  
son. (Page 164)  
The data is damaged or an attempt Use appropriate data and store it correctly.  
was made to set an image file that (Page 164)  
was not made to specifications as  
the splash screen.  
195  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Message  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Connection failed.  
The cellular phone’s Bluetooth wire- Activate the target phone’s Bluetooth wire-  
less technology is turned off.  
less technology.  
The cellular phone is paired (con-  
nected) with another device.  
Cancel the pairing (connection) and retry.  
Rejection has been received from  
the cellular phone.  
Operate the target phone and accept the con-  
nection request from the navigation system.  
(Furthermore, check the connection settings  
on your cellular phone.)  
The target cellular phone cannot be Check whether your cellular phone is acti-  
found.  
vated and, whether the distance to your cellu-  
lar phone is not too far.  
Could not find any available  
phone.  
No available phone exists in the sur- ! Activate the target phone’s Bluetooth wire-  
roundings when the system  
less technology.  
searches for connectable cellular  
! Check whether your cellular phone is acti-  
phones featuring Bluetooth wireless vated and, whether the distance to your cellu-  
technology. lar phone is not too far.  
Registration failed.  
The cellular phone’s Bluetooth wire- Keep turning the target phone’s Bluetooth  
less technology is turned off during wireless technology on during the registra-  
the registration step.  
tion.  
Rejection by the cellular phone has Operate the target phone and accept the re-  
received.  
gistration request from the navigation system.  
(Furthermore, check the connection settings  
on your cellular phone.)  
Registration step has failed for  
some reason.  
Retry the registration and if the registration  
still fails, try registering using your cellular  
phone.  
196  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Messages for audio functions  
When problems occur with AV source playback, an error message appears on the display. Refer  
to the table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error  
persists, record the error message and contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer service center.  
The messages in “( )” will appear on the “Rear display”.  
Built-in DVD drive  
Message  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Reading error  
Dirty  
Clean the disc.  
(ERROR-02-XX)  
Scratched disc  
Replace the disc.  
The disc is loaded upside down  
Check that the disc is loaded correctly.  
Playback error. Please remove Electrical or mechanical  
! Replace the disc.  
the disc.  
! Set the ACC to off and then set it to on  
again.  
Region code cannot be  
The disc does not have the same re- Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing the  
matched (DIFFERENT REGION gion number as the navigation sys- correct region number.  
DISC)  
tem.  
Unreadable disc  
This type of disc cannot be played  
by the navigation system.  
Replace the disc with one the navigation sys-  
tem can play. (Page 208, Page 224)  
Playback error due to irregu- The temperature of the navigation  
Wait until the unit’s temperature returns to  
lar temperature. Please re-  
move the disc. (THERMAL  
PROTECTION IN MOTION)  
system is out of the normal operat- within normal operating limits.  
ing range.  
Error not defined (ERROR-FF- Undefined error  
FF)  
Set the ACC to off and then set it to on again.  
The protected files are skipped.  
Tracks that cannot be played Files that are protected by digital  
back will be skipped (FILE  
rights management (DRM).  
SKIPPED)  
Cannot play back all tracks  
(PROTECTED DISC)  
All the files on the inserted disc are Replace the disc.  
secured by DRM.  
Flash writing error. Impossible The playback history for VOD con-  
! Retry.  
to write on the flash. (CAN  
tents cannot be saved for some rea- ! If the message appears frequently, consult  
NOT SAVE DATA)  
son.  
your dealer.  
Authorization Error (AUTHOR- The device does not match the de-  
IZATION ERROR)  
Check whether this device has been regis-  
vice registered with the VOD provi- tered with the VOD provider.  
der. VOD content cannot be played  
back.  
Cannot play back HD file (FILE High definition (HD) DivX video can- Create playable one and retry.  
NOT PLAYABLE-HIGH DEF)  
not be played.  
SD/USB/iPod  
Message  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Tracks that cannot be played Files that are protected by digital  
back will be skipped rights management (DRM).  
The protected files are skipped.  
This type of file cannot be played by Replace it with the playable file. (Page 208,  
this unit. Page 224)  
197  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Message  
Cause  
Action (Reference)  
Cannot play back all tracks  
All the files on the inserted external Store playable files.  
storage device are secured by DRM.  
All of the files cannot be played by  
this unit.  
Replace it with the playable file. (Page 208,  
Page 224)  
USB flash drive was discon-  
The USB connector or USB cable is Confirm that the USB connector or USB  
nected for device protection. short-circuited.  
Do not connect this USB flash  
cable is not caught in something or da-  
maged.  
drive to the unit. To restart  
USB, restart the unit.  
The connected USB storage device Disconnect the USB storage device and do  
consumes more than 500 mA (maxi- not use it. Turn the ignition switch to off, then  
mum allowable current).  
to ACC or on and then connect the compliant  
USB storage device.  
The USB interface cable for iPod is Confirm that USB interface cable for iPod or  
short-circuited.  
USB cable is not caught in something or da-  
maged.  
Authorization failure. iPod is The iPod is not compatible with this Use an iPod of a compatible version.  
not connected.  
navigation system.  
Communication failure  
! Disconnect the cable from iPod. Once iPod  
main menu is displayed, connect the cable  
again.  
! If the message appears frequently, consult  
your dealer.  
198  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
pulse. So you connect the speed pulse without  
Positioning technology  
Positioning by GPS  
fail to get the accuracy of positioning.  
p The position of the speed detection circuit  
vary depending on the vehicle model. For  
details, consult your authorized Pioneer  
dealer or an installation professional.  
p Some types of vehicles may not output a  
speed signal while driving at just a few kilo-  
meters per hour. In such a case, the current  
location of your vehicle may not be dis-  
played correctly while in traffic congestion  
or in a parking lot.  
The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a  
network of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each  
of the satellites, which orbit at a height of  
21 000 km, continually broadcasts radio sig-  
nals giving time and position information. This  
ensures that signals from at least three can be  
picked up from any open area on the earth’s  
surface.  
The accuracy of the GPS information depends  
on how good the reception is. When the sig-  
nals are strong and reception is good, GPS  
can determine latitude, longitude and altitude  
for accurate positioning in three dimensions.  
But if signal quality is poor, only two dimen-  
sions, latitude and longitude, can be obtained  
and positioning errors are somewhat greater.  
How do GPS and dead  
reckoning work together?  
For maximum accuracy, your navigation sys-  
tem continually compares GPS data with your  
estimated position as calculated from the data  
of built-in sensor. However, if only the data  
from the built-in sensor is available for a long  
period, positioning errors are gradually com-  
pounded until the estimated position becomes  
unreliable. For this reason, whenever GPS sig-  
nals are available, they are matched with the  
data of the built-in sensor and used to correct  
it for improved accuracy.  
p If you use chains on your wheels for winter  
driving or put on the spare wheel, errors  
may suddenly increase because of differ-  
ence in wheel diameter. Initialize the sensor  
status and it may recover the accuracy to  
normal condition.  
Positioning by dead reckoning  
The built-in sensor in the navigation system  
also calculates your position. The current loca-  
tion is measured by detecting driving distance  
with the speed pulse, the turning direction  
with the gyro sensor and inclination of the  
road with the G sensor.  
= For details, refer to Clearing status on  
page 149.  
The built-in sensor can even calculate  
changes of altitude, and correct the discrepan-  
cies in the distance traveled caused by driving  
along winding roads or up slopes.  
If you use this navigation system with connect-  
ing the speed pulse, the system will become  
more accurate than no connection of speed  
199  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Map matching  
When positioning by GPS is  
impossible  
As mentioned, the positioning systems used  
by this navigation system are susceptible to  
certain errors. Their calculations may, on occa-  
sion, place you in a location on the map where  
no road exists. In this situation, the processing  
system understands that vehicles travel only  
on roads, and can correct your position by ad-  
justing it to a nearby road. This is called map  
matching.  
!
GPS positioning is disabled if signals can-  
not be received from more than two GPS  
satellites.  
!
In some driving conditions, signals from  
GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle.  
In this case, it is impossible for the system  
to use GPS positioning.  
In tunnels or en-  
closed parking  
garages  
Under elevated  
roads or similar  
structures  
With map matching  
When driving  
among high build-  
ings  
When driving through  
a dense forest or tall  
trees  
!
!
If a car phone or cellular phone is used  
near the GPS antenna, GPS reception may  
be lost temporarily.  
Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray  
paint or car wax, because this may block  
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup  
can also degrade the signals, so keep the  
antenna clear.  
Without map matching  
Handling large errors  
Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by  
combining GPS, dead reckoning and map  
matching. However, in some situations, these  
functions may not work properly, and the error  
may become bigger.  
p If a GPS signal has not been received for a  
long time, your vehicle’s actual position  
and the current position mark on the map  
may diverge considerably or may not be up-  
dated. In such case, once GPS reception is  
restored, accuracy will be recovered.  
200  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
If you drive in zigzags.  
Conditions likely to cause  
noticeable positioning errors  
For various reasons, such as the state of the  
road you are traveling on and the reception  
status of the GPS signal, the actual position of  
your vehicle may differ from the position dis-  
played on the map screen.  
If the road has a series of hairpin bends.  
!
!
If you make a shallow turn.  
If there is a parallel road.  
!
If there is a loop or similar road configura-  
tion.  
!
!
If there is another road very nearby, such  
as in the case of an elevated freeway.  
!
!
If you take a ferry.  
If you take a recently opened road that is  
not on the map.  
If you are driving on a long, straight road or  
a gently curving road.  
201  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
If you are on a steep mountain road with  
many height changes.  
!
!
If trees or other obstacles block the GPS  
signals for a considerable period.  
If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-  
stop manner, as in a traffic congestion.  
!
!
If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot  
or similar structure using a spiral ramp.  
If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si-  
milar structure.  
!
If you join the road after driving around a  
large parking lot.  
!
!
When you drive around a traffic circle.  
!
If your vehicle’s wheels spin, such as on a  
gravel road or in snow.  
When starting driving immediately after  
starting the engine.  
!
If you put on chains, or change your tires  
for ones with a different size.  
202  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
current heading. In such cases, you are in-  
structed to turn around, so please turn  
around safely by following the actual traffic  
rules.  
Route setting information  
Route search specifications  
Your navigation system sets a route to your  
destination by applying certain built-in rules to  
the map data. This section provides some use-  
ful information about how a route is set.  
!
!
In some cases, a route may begin on the  
opposite side of a railway or river from your  
actual current location. If this happens,  
drive towards your destination for a while,  
and try route calculation again.  
When there is a traffic congestion ahead, a  
detour route may not be suggested if driv-  
ing through the traffic congestion would  
still be better than taking the detour.  
There may be instances when the starting  
point, the waypoint and the destination  
point are not on the highlighted route.  
The number of traffic circle exits displayed  
on the screen may differ from the actual  
number of roads.  
CAUTION  
When a route is calculated, the route and voice  
guidance for the route are automatically set.  
Also, for day or time traffic regulations, only infor-  
mation about traffic regulations applicable at the  
time when the route was calculated is consid-  
ered. One-way streets and street closures may  
not be taken into consideration. For example, if a  
street is open during the morning only, but you  
arrive later, it would be against the traffic regula-  
tions so you cannot drive along the set route.  
When driving, please follow the actual traffic  
signs. Also, the system may not know some traf-  
fic regulations.  
!
!
Route highlighting  
!
Once set, the route is highlighted in bright  
color on the map.  
!
The calculated route is one example of the  
route to your destination decided by the na-  
vigation system while taking the type of  
streets or traffic regulations into account. It  
is not necessarily an optimum route. (In  
some cases, you may not be able to set the  
streets you want to take. If you need to take  
a certain street, set a waypoint on that  
street.)  
If the destination is too far, there may be in-  
stances where the route cannot be set. (If  
you want to set a long-distance route going  
across several areas, set waypoints along  
the way.)  
During voice guidance, turns and intersec-  
tions from the freeway are announced.  
However, if you pass intersections, turns,  
and other guidance points in rapid succes-  
sion, some may delay or not be announced.  
It is possible that guidance may direct you  
off a freeway and then back on again.  
In some cases, the route may require you  
to travel in the opposite direction to your  
!
The immediate vicinity of your starting  
point and destination may not be high-  
lighted, and neither will areas with particu-  
larly complex road layouts. Consequently,  
the route may appear to be cut off on the  
display, but voice guidance will continue.  
Auto reroute function  
!
If you deviate from the set route, the system  
will re-calculate the route from that point  
so that you remain on track to the destina-  
tion.  
This function may not work under certain  
conditions.  
!
!
!
Handling and care of discs  
Some basic precautions are necessary when  
handling your discs.  
!
!
203  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
Despite our careful design of the product,  
small scratches that do not affect actual  
operation may appear on the disc surface  
as a result of mechanical wear, ambient  
conditions for use or handling of the disc.  
This is not a sign of the malfunction of this  
product. Consider it to be normal wear and  
tear.  
Built-in drive and care  
!
Use only conventional, fully circular discs.  
Do not use shaped discs.  
!
!
Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or  
otherwise damaged discs as they may da-  
mage the built-in drive.  
Do not touch the recorded surface of the  
discs.  
Store discs in their cases when not in use.  
Avoid leaving discs in excessively hot envir-  
onments including under direct sunlight.  
Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-  
micals to the surface of the discs.  
To clean a disc, wipe it with a soft cloth,  
moving outward from the center.  
Playable discs  
DVD-Video and CD  
DVD and CD discs that display the logos  
shown below generally can be played on this  
built-in DVD drive.  
!
!
DVD-Video  
!
!
CD  
!
!
Condensation may temporarily impair the  
built-in drive’s performance. Leave it to ad-  
just to the warmer temperature for about  
one hour. Also, wipe any damp discs with a  
soft cloth.  
Playback of discs may not be possible be-  
cause of disc characteristics, disc format,  
recorded application, playback environ-  
ment, storage conditions and so on.  
Road shocks may interrupt disc playback.  
Read the precautions for discs before  
using them.  
p
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo  
Licensing Corporation.  
p It is not possible to play DVD-Audio discs.  
This DVD drive may not be able to play all  
discs bearing the marks shown above.  
!
!
AVCHD recorded discs  
This unit is not compatible with discs recorded  
in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Defi-  
nition) format. Do not insert AVCHD discs. If  
inserted, the disc may not be ejected.  
Ambient conditions for playing  
a disc  
!
At extremely high temperatures, a tempera-  
ture cutout protects this product by switch-  
ing it off automatically.  
204  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Playing DualDisc  
Detailed information for  
playable media  
Compatibility  
!
DualDiscs are two-sided discs that have a  
recordable CD for audio on one side and a  
recordable DVD for video on the other.  
Playback of the DVD side is possible with  
this navigation system. However, since the  
CD side of DualDiscs is not physically com-  
patible with the general CD standard, it  
may not be possible to play the CD side  
with this navigation system.  
!
Common notes about disc compatibility  
!
!
!
!
Certain functions of this product may not  
be available for some discs.  
Compatibility with all discs is not guaran-  
teed.  
It is not possible to playback DVD-ROM/  
DVD-RAM discs.  
Playback of discs may become impossible  
with direct exposure to sunlight, high tem-  
peratures, or depending on the storage  
conditions in the vehicle.  
!
!
Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual-  
Disc may result in scratches to the disc.  
Serious scratches can lead to playback pro-  
blems on this navigation system. In some  
cases, a DualDisc may become stuck in  
the disc loading slot and will not eject. To  
prevent this, we recommend you refrain  
from using DualDisc with this navigation  
system.  
DVD-Video discs  
DVD-Video discs that have incompatible re-  
!
!
Please refer to the manufacturer for more  
detailed information about DualDiscs.  
gion numbers cannot be played on this  
DVD drive. The region number of the player  
can be found on this product’s chassis.  
Dolby Digital  
This product will down-mix Dolby Digital sig-  
nals internally and the sound will be output in  
stereo.  
p Manufactured under license from Dolby  
Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D  
symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-R DL (Dual  
Layer) discs  
!
Unfinalized discs which have been re-  
corded with the Video format (video mode)  
cannot be played back.  
Discs which have been recorded with the  
Video Recording format (VR mode) cannot  
be played back.  
!
!
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs which have  
been recorded with Layer Jump recording  
cannot be played back.  
For detailed information about recording  
mode, please contact the manufacturer of  
media, recorders, or writing software.  
DTS sound  
DTS audio format cannot be output, so select  
an audio track other than DTS audio format.  
“DTS” is registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.  
CD-R/CD-RW discs  
!
Unfinalized discs cannot be played back.  
205  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
It may not be possible to playback CD-R/  
CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re-  
corder or a personal computer because of  
disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on  
the disc, or dirt, scratches or condensation  
on the lens of the built-in drive.  
Playback of discs recorded on a personal  
computer may not be possible, depending  
on the recording device, writing software,  
their settings, and other environmental fac-  
tors.  
Please record with the correct format. (For  
details, please contact manufacturer of  
media, recorders, or writing software.)  
Titles and other text information recorded  
on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be dis-  
played by this product (in the case of audio  
data (CD-DA)).  
USB storage device compatibility  
= For details about USB storage device com-  
patibility with this navigation system, refer  
to Specifications on page 224.  
Protocol: bulk  
!
!
!
You cannot connect a USB storage device  
to this navigation system via a USB hub.  
Partitioned USB memory is not compatible  
with this navigation system.  
Firmly secure the USB storage device when  
driving. Do not let the USB storage device  
fall onto the floor, where it may become  
jammed under the brake or gas pedal.  
There may be a slight delay when starting  
playback of audio files encoded with image  
data.  
Some USB storage devices connected to  
this navigation system may generate noise  
on the radio.  
Do not connect anything other than the  
USB memory device.  
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW  
discs before using them.  
The sequence of audio files on USB mem-  
ory  
For USB memory, the sequence is different  
from that of USB memory device.  
Common notes about the external  
storage device (USB, SD)  
!
Do not leave the external storage device  
(USB, SD) in any location with high tem-  
peratures.  
!
Depending on the kind of the external sto-  
rage device (USB, SD) you use, this naviga-  
tion system may not recognize the storage  
device or files may not be played back prop-  
erly.  
SD memory card and SDHC memory card  
= For details about SD memory card compat-  
ibility with this navigation system, refer to  
Specifications on page 224.  
!
The text information of some audio and  
video files may not be correctly displayed.  
File extensions must be used properly.  
There may be a slight delay when starting  
playback of files on an external storage de-  
vice (USB, SD) with complex folder hierar-  
chies.  
Handling guidelines and  
supplemental information  
!
!
!
This system is not compatible with Multi  
Media Card (MMC).  
!
Copyright protected files cannot be played  
back.  
!
!
Operations may vary depending on the  
kind of an external storage device (USB,  
SD).  
It may not be possible to play some music  
files from SD or USB because of file char-  
acteristics, file format, recorded applica-  
tion, playback environment, storage  
conditions, and so on.  
Notes specific to DivX files  
!
Only DivX files downloaded from DivX part-  
ner sites are guaranteed for proper opera-  
tion. Unauthorized DivX files may not  
operate properly.  
!
DRM rental files cannot be operated until  
playing back is started.  
206  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
The navigation system corresponds to a  
DivX file display of up to 1 590 minutes 43  
seconds. Search operations beyond this  
time limit are prohibited.  
DivX VOD file playback requires supplying  
the ID code of this navigation system to the  
DivX VOD provider. Regarding the ID code,  
refer to Displaying your DivX VOD registra-  
tion code on page 171.  
!
!
For materials that use a high transfer rate,  
the subtitles and video may not be comple-  
tely synchronized.  
If multiple subtitles are programed to dis-  
play within a very short time frame, such as  
0.1 seconds, the subtitles may not be dis-  
played at the correct time.  
!
!
Plays all versions of DivX video (including  
DivX 6) with standard playback of DivX  
media files.  
For more details about DivX, visit the follow-  
ing site:  
http://www.divx.com/  
DivX subtitle files  
!
Srt format subtitle files with the extension  
“.srt” can be used.  
!
Only one subtitle file can be used for each  
DivX file. Multiple subtitle files cannot be  
associated.  
!
Subtitle files that are named with the same  
character string as the DivX file before the  
extension are associated with the DivX file.  
The character strings before the extension  
must be exactly the same. However, if there  
is only one DivX file and one subtitle file in  
a single folder, the files are associated even  
if the file names are not the same.  
The subtitle file must be stored in the same  
folder as the DivX file.  
Up to 255 subtitle files may be used. Any  
more subtitle files will not be recognized.  
Up to 64 characters can be used for the  
name of the subtitle file, including the ex-  
tension. If more than 64 characters are  
used for the file name, the subtitle file may  
not be recognized.  
!
!
!
!
!
The character code for the subtitle file  
should comply with ISO-8859-1. Using char-  
acters other than ISO-8859-1 may cause the  
characters to be displayed incorrectly.  
The subtitles may not be displayed correctly  
if the displayed characters in the subtitle  
file include control code.  
207  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Media compatibility chart  
General  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
SD memory card  
ISO9660 level 1,  
ISO9660 level 2,  
Romeo, Joliet  
and UDF 1.02  
ISO9660 level 1,  
ISO9660 level 2,  
Romeo and Joliet  
File system  
FAT16/FAT32  
Maximum number of  
folders  
700  
300  
Maximum number of  
files  
999  
3 500  
2 500  
MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, AVI, WMV,  
MPEG-4  
Playable file types  
MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX  
Note:  
Maximum playback time of audio file stored in the external storage device (USB, SD): 7.5 h (450 minutes)  
MP3 compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
SD memory card  
File extension  
Bit rate  
.mp3  
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR  
16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
for emphasis)  
Sampling frequency  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
ID3 tag  
ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3  
ID3 tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4  
Notes:  
!
!
Ver. 2.x of ID3 tag is given priority when both Ver. 1.x and Ver. 2.x exist.  
The navigation system is not compatible with the following:  
MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO, m3u playlist  
208  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
WMA compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
.wma  
SD memory card  
File extension  
Bit rate  
5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
Sampling frequency  
Note:  
The navigation system is not compatible with the following:  
™
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional, Lossless, Voice  
WAV compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
SD memory card  
File extension  
Format  
.wav  
Linear PCM (LPCM), IMA-ADPCM  
WAV files on the CD-R/-RW, DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL cannot be played.  
LPCM: 16 kHz to 48 kHz  
IMA-ADPCM: 22.05 kHz and 44.1 kHz  
Sampling frequency  
LPCM: 8 bits and 16 bits  
MS ADPCM: 4 bits  
Quantization bits  
Note:  
The sampling frequency shown in the display may be rounded.  
AAC compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
SD memory card  
File extension  
Bit rate  
.m4a  
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR)  
8 kHz to 44.1 kHz  
Sampling frequency  
Note:  
8 kHz to 48 kHz  
The navigation system plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes.  
209  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
DivX compatibility  
DVD-R/-RW/-R  
DL  
USB storage de-  
vice  
Media  
CD-R/-RW  
SD memory card  
File extension  
Profile (DivX version)  
.avi/.divx  
Home Theater Ver. 3.11/Ver. 4.x/Ver. 5.x/  
Ver. 6.x  
Compatible audio codec MP3, Dolby Digital  
DivX files on the external storage device  
(USB, SD) cannot be played.  
Bit rate (MP3)  
8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR  
Sampling frequency  
(MP3)  
16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
for emphasis)  
Maximum image size  
Maximum file size  
Notes:  
720 pixels × 576 pixels  
4 GB  
!
The navigation system is not compatible with the following:  
DivX Ultra format, DivX files without video data, DivX files encoded with LPCM (Linear PCM) audio codec  
Depending on the file information composition, such as the number of audio streams, there may be a slight  
delay in the start of playback on discs.  
!
!
!
!
If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback stops before the end.  
Some special operations may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files.  
Files with high transfer rates may not be played back correctly. The standard transfer rate is 4 Mbps for CDs and  
10.08 Mbps for DVDs.  
210  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Video files compatibility (USB, SD)  
File extension  
Format  
.avi  
.mp4, .m4v  
MPEG-4  
.wmv  
WMV  
WMV  
MPEG-4  
MPEG-4  
H.264  
H.264  
Compatible video codec  
MPEG-4  
Linear PCM  
(LPCM), IMA-  
ADPCM  
Compatible audio codec  
AAC  
AAC  
WMA  
MP3  
Bit rate:  
768 kbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Bit rate:  
768 kbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Bit rate:  
384 kbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Bit rate:  
384 kbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Recommended  
video specifica-  
tions  
Image size: QVGA  
(320 pixels x 240  
pixels)  
Image size:  
WQVGA  
(400 pixels x 240  
pixels)  
Bit rate:  
768 kbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Bit rate: 2 Mbps Bit rate: 2 Mbps Bit rate: 1 Mbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Maximum bit rate:  
Maximum file size  
Bit rate:  
576 kbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Bit rate:  
576 kbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Image size: VGA  
(640 pixels x 480  
pixels)  
Bit rate: 1 Mbps Bit rate: 1 Mbps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
Frame rate:  
30 fps  
2 GB  
Maximum playback time  
150 minutes  
Common notes  
cording to the width of each character, and  
of the display area.  
Folder selection sequence or other opera-  
tions may be altered, depending on the en-  
coding or writing software.  
Regardless of the length of blank section  
between the songs of original recording,  
compressed audio discs play with a short  
pause between songs.  
!
The navigation system may not operate cor-  
rectly, depending on the application used  
to encode WMA files.  
!
!
!
Depending on the version of Windows  
Media Player used to encode WMA files,  
™
album names and other text information  
may not be correctly displayed.  
!
There may be a slight delay when starting  
playback of audio files encoded with image  
data.  
!
!
The navigation system is not compatible  
with packet write data transfer.  
This navigation system can recognize up to  
32 characters, beginning with the first char-  
acter, including extension for the file and  
folder name. Depending on the display  
area, the navigation system may try to dis-  
play them with a reduced font size. How-  
ever, the maximum number of the  
characters that you can display varies ac-  
211  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
second. Bluetooth was launched by a special  
interest group (SIG) comprising Ericsson Inc.,  
Intel Corp., Nokia Corp., Toshiba and IBM in  
1998, and it is currently developed by nearly  
2 000 companies worldwide.  
Example of a hierarchy  
The following figure is an example of the tier  
structure in the disc. The numbers in the fig-  
ure indicate the order in which folder numbers  
are assigned and the order to be played back.  
: Folder  
!
The Bluetoothâ word mark and logos are re-  
gistered trademarks owned by Bluetooth  
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by  
Pioneer Corporation is under license. Other  
trademarks and trade names are those of  
their respective owners.  
: File  
1
2
3
About the SAT RADIO  
READY Logo  
4
5
6
Level 1  
Level 2 Level 3 Level 4  
The SAT RADIO READY logo indicates that the  
Satellite Radio Tuner for Pioneer (i. e., XM  
tuner and Sirius satellite tuner which are sold  
separately) can be controlled by this naviga-  
tion system. Please inquire with your dealer or  
nearest authorized Pioneer service station re-  
garding the satellite radio tuner that can be  
connected to this navigation system.  
Notes  
!
!
This product assigns folder numbers. The user  
cannot assign folder numbers.  
If there is a folder that does not contain any  
playable file, the folder itself will display in the  
folder list but you cannot check any files in  
the folder. (A blank list will appear.) Also,  
these folders will be skipped without display-  
ing the folder number.  
Note:  
The system will use direct satellite-to-receiver  
broadcasting technology to provide listeners  
in their cars and at home with crystal-clear  
sound seamlessly from coast to coast. Satel-  
lite radio will create and package over 100  
channels of digital- quality music, news,  
sports, talk and children’s programming.  
“SAT Radio”, the SAT Radio logo and all re-  
lated marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite  
Radio inc., and XM Satellite Radio Inc.  
Bluetooth  
HD Radio Technology  
HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio Ready  
logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Di-  
gital Corporation.  
Bluetooth is a short-range wireless radio con-  
nectivity technology that is developed as a  
cable replacement for cellular phones, hand-  
held PCs and other devices. Bluetooth oper-  
ates in 2.4 GHz frequency range and transmits  
voice and data at speeds up to 1 megabit per  
™
212  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
SD and SDHC logo  
DivX  
SD Logo is a trademark.  
DivX is a compressed digital video format cre-  
ated by the DivX video codec from DivX, Inc.  
This unit can play DivX video files recorded on  
CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs.  
Keeping the same terminology as DVD video,  
individual DivX video files are called “Titles”.  
When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW or a  
DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind  
that by default they will be played in alphabeti-  
cal order.  
SDHC Logo is a trademark.  
microSD Logo is a trademark.  
For U.S.A.  
DivX® is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc.,  
and is used under license.  
For Canada  
™
DivX is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc.,  
and is used under license.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital  
video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an of-  
ficial DivX Certified device that plays DivX  
video. Visit www.divx.com for more informa-  
tion and software tools to convert your files  
into DivX video.  
microSDHC Logo is a trademark.  
WMA/WMV  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This  
DivX® Certified device must be registered in  
order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)  
content. To generate the registration code, lo-  
cate the DivX VOD section in Displaying your  
DivX VOD registration code. Go to vod.divx.com  
with this code to complete the registration pro-  
cess and learn more about DivX VOD.  
= For details, refer to Displaying your DivX  
VOD registration code on page 171.  
™
Windows Media and the Windows logo are  
trademarks or registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
213  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Apple is not responsible for the operation of  
this device or its compliance with safety and  
regulatory standards.  
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in  
the U.S. and other countries.  
AAC  
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and  
refers to an audio compression technology  
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. Sev-  
eral applications can be used to encode AAC  
files, but file formats and extensions differ de-  
pending on the application which is used to  
encode. This unit plays back AAC files en-  
coded by iTunes version 7.7.  
iPhone  
Detailed information  
regarding connectable iPods  
CAUTION  
“Works with iPhone” means that an electronic  
accessory has been designed to connect spe-  
cifically to iPhone and has been certified by  
the developer to meet Apple performance  
standards.  
Apple is not responsible for the operation of  
this device or its compliance with safety and  
regulatory standards.  
!
!
Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost  
from an iPod, even if that data is lost while  
using the navigation system.  
Do not leave the iPod in direct sunlight for ex-  
tended amounts of time. Extended exposure  
to direct sunlight can result in iPod malfunc-  
tion due to the resulting high temperature.  
Do not leave the iPod in any location with  
high temperatures.  
Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not  
let the iPod fall onto the floor, where it may be-  
come jammed under the brake or gas pedal.  
!
!
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.  
iTunes  
iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered  
in the U.S. and other countries.  
For details, refer to the iPod’s manuals.  
iPod  
Using the LCD screen correctly  
Handling the LCD screen  
!
When the LCD screen is subjected to direct  
sunlight for a long period of time, it will be-  
come very hot, resulting in possible da-  
mage to the LCD screen. When not using  
this navigation system, avoid exposing it to  
direct sunlight as much as possible.  
The LCD screen should be used within the  
temperature ranges shown in Specifica-  
tions.  
“Made for iPod” means that an electronic ac-  
cessory has been designed to connect specifi-  
cally to iPod and has been certified by the  
developer to meet Apple performance stan-  
dards.  
!
214  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
!
!
Do not use the LCD screen at temperatures  
higher or lower than the operating tem-  
perature range, because the LCD screen  
may not operate normally and could be da-  
maged.  
The LCD screen is exposed in order to in-  
crease its visibility within the vehicle.  
Please do not press strongly on it as this  
may damage it.  
Do not push the LCD screen with excessive  
force as this may scratch it.  
Never touch the LCD screen with anything  
besides your finger when operating the  
Touch panel functions. The LCD screen can  
scratch easily.  
LED (light-emitting diode)  
backlight  
A light emitting diode is used inside the dis-  
play to illuminate the LCD screen.  
!
At low temperatures, using the LED back-  
light may increase image lag and degrade  
the image quality because of the character-  
istics of the LCD screen. Image quality will  
improve with an increase in temperature.  
The product lifetime of the LED backlight is  
more than 10 000 hours. However, it may  
decrease if used in high temperatures.  
If the LED backlight reaches the end of its  
product lifetime, the screen will become  
dimmer and the image will no longer be  
visible. In that case, please consult your  
dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer  
Service Station.  
!
!
!
!
Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen  
!
If the LCD screen is near the vent of an air  
conditioner, make sure that air from the air  
conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from  
the heater may break the LCD screen, and  
cool air from the cooler may cause moist-  
ure to form inside the navigation unit, re-  
sulting in possible damage.  
!
Small black dots or white dots (bright dots)  
may appear on the LCD screen. These are  
due to the characteristics of the LCD  
screen and do not indicate a malfunction.  
The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is  
exposed to direct sunlight.  
When using a cellular phone, keep the an-  
tenna of the cellular phone away from the  
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the  
video in the form of disturbances such as  
spots or colored stripes.  
!
!
Maintaining the LCD screen  
!
When removing dust from the LCD screen  
or cleaning it, first turn the system power  
off, then wipe with a soft dry cloth.  
!
When wiping the LCD screen, take care not  
to scratch the surface. Do not use harsh or  
abrasive chemical cleaners.  
215  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Display information  
Destination Menu  
Phone Menu  
Page  
Page  
68  
Address  
Return Home  
POI  
34  
Dial Pad  
36  
Call Home  
69  
Contacts  
69  
Gas Station  
ATM  
Contacts Transfer  
Received Calls  
Dialed Calls  
Missed Calls  
GOOG-411  
72  
69  
36  
Coffee  
69  
Hotel  
69  
Spell Name  
Near Me  
37  
70  
37  
Near Destination  
Around City  
AVIC FEEDS  
Favorites  
38  
38  
39  
39, 46  
39, 49  
45  
History  
Cancel Route  
MSN Direct  
Coordinates  
Route Overview  
50  
40  
42  
216  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
Navi Settings menu  
Settings Menu  
Page  
148  
149  
150  
152  
152  
152  
153  
153  
Page  
148  
161  
168  
171  
154  
73  
Connection Status  
3D Calibration Status  
Gas Mileage  
Navi Settings  
System Settings  
AV Settings  
Drive Log Settings  
Demo Mode  
AV Sound  
Map Settings  
Bluetooth Settings  
Setting Replicator  
Set Home  
Modify Current Location  
Eco Settings  
176  
217  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
System Settings menu  
Map Settings menu  
Page  
Page  
Regional Settings  
Displayed Info  
Close Up View  
City Map  
Program Language, Voice Lan-  
guage  
161  
154  
155  
155  
155  
156  
156  
156  
156  
157  
157  
157  
160  
157  
29  
Time  
162  
162  
162  
163  
163  
164  
165  
165  
166  
188  
City Map Barrier  
Show Traffic Incident  
Bluetooth Connected  
Current Street Name  
Favorites Icon  
km / mile  
Average Speed  
Volume  
Splash Screen  
Back Camera  
3D Land Mark  
Screen Calibration  
Illumi Color  
Show Maneuver  
MSN Direct  
Service Information  
Restore Factory Settings  
Show Eco Meter  
Quick Access Selection  
Overlay POI  
View Mode  
Day/Night Display  
AV Guide Mode  
Road Color  
159  
160  
159  
218  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
AV System Settings menu  
AV Sound Settings menu  
Page  
168  
168  
169  
170  
170  
169  
171  
170  
Page  
FAD/BAL (Balance)  
EQ  
172  
AV1 Input  
AV2 Input  
Wide Mode  
Mute  
172  
174  
174  
175  
175  
175  
175  
Loudness  
Sub Woofer  
HPF  
Mute Level  
Rear SP  
SLA  
Bass Booster  
Staging  
DivX VOD  
VR Catalog Menu  
219  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Bluetooth Settings menu  
Page  
66  
Connection  
Registration  
63  
Device Name  
73  
Password  
73  
Bluetooth On/Off  
Echo Cancel  
73  
74  
Auto Answer Preference  
Refuse All Calls  
Clear Memory  
Firmware update  
74  
74  
75  
75  
220  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Glossary  
DivX  
DivX is a popular media technology created by  
DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com-  
pressed video with high visual quality that  
maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files  
can also include advanced media features like  
menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks.  
Many DivX media files are available for down-  
load online, and you can create your own  
using your personal content and easy-to-use  
tools from DivX.com.  
AAC  
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and  
refers to an audio compression technology  
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4.  
Aspect ratio  
This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen.  
A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3.  
Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of  
16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional  
presence and atmosphere.  
DivX Certified  
DivX Certified products are officially tested by  
the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all  
versions of DivX video, including DivX 6.  
Bit rate  
This expresses data volume per second, or bps  
units (bits per second). The higher the rate,  
the more information is available to reproduce  
the sound. Using the same encoding method  
(such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better  
the sound.  
Favorites  
A frequently visited location (such as your  
workplace or a relative’s home) that you can  
register to allow easy routing.  
Built-in sensor  
The built-in sensor that enables the system to  
estimate your vehicle’s position.  
GPS  
Global Positioning System. A network of satel-  
lites that provides navigation signals for a vari-  
ety of purposes.  
CD-DA  
This stands for a general music CD (commer-  
cial-release audio CD). In this manual, this  
word is sometime used for a distinction be-  
tween data CDs (which include compressed  
audio files) and general music CDs.  
Guidance mode  
The mode in which guidance is given as you  
drive to your destination; the system automati-  
cally switches to this mode as soon as a route  
has been set.  
Chapter  
Guidance point  
Titles of DVD-Video are in turn divided into  
chapters which are numbered in the same  
way as the chapters of a book. With discs fea-  
turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired  
scene with chapter search.  
These are important landmarks along your  
route, generally intersections. The next gui-  
dance point along your route is indicated on  
the map by the yellow flag icon.  
Home location  
Your registered home location.  
Current location  
The present location of your vehicle; your cur-  
rent location is shown on the map by a red tri-  
angle mark.  
Destination  
A location you choose as the end point of your  
journey.  
221  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
ID3 tag  
MPEG  
This is a method of embedding track-related  
information in an MP3 file. This embedded in-  
formation can include the track title, the ar-  
tist’s name, the album title, the music genre,  
the year of production, comments and other  
data. The contents can be freely edited using  
software with ID3 tag editing functions.  
Although the tags are restricted by the num-  
ber of characters, the information can be  
viewed when the track is played back.  
This stands for Moving Pictures Experts  
Group, and is an international video image  
compression standard.  
Multi-angle  
With regular TV programs, although multiple  
cameras are used to simultaneously shoot  
scenes, only images from one camera at a  
time are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDs  
feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let-  
ting you choose your viewing angle as desired.  
ISO 9660 format  
Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)  
Some videos feature dialog recorded in multi-  
ple languages or audio recorded in multiple  
tracks. For example, dialog in up to eight lan-  
guages can be recorded on a single DVD-Vi-  
deo, letting you choose the language as  
desired.  
This is the international standard for the for-  
mat logic of DVD/CD-ROM folders and files.  
For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations  
for the following two levels:  
!
Level 1:  
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name  
consists of up to eight characters, half-byte  
English capital letters, half-byte numerals  
and the “_” sign, with a file-extension of  
three characters).  
Multi-session  
Multi-session is a recording method that al-  
lows additional data to be recorded later.  
When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or  
CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is  
treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses-  
sion is a method of recording more than two  
sessions in one disc.  
!
!
Level 2:  
The file name can have up to 31 characters  
(including the separation mark “.” and a file  
extension). Each folder contains less than  
eight hierarchies.  
Extended formats  
Joliet:  
Multi-subtitle  
File names can have up to 64 characters.  
Romeo:  
File names can have up to 128 characters.  
For example, subtitles in up to 32 languages  
can be recorded on a single DVD-Video, letting  
you choose as desired.  
JPEG  
Packet write  
This stands for Joint Photographic Experts  
Group, and is an international still image com-  
pression standard.  
This is a general term for a method of writing  
individual files to a CD-R, etc. whenever re-  
quired, just as is done with files on floppy or  
hard disks.  
MP3  
MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an  
audio compression standard established by a  
working group (MPEG) of the ISO (Interna-  
tional Organization for Standardization). MP3  
is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th  
the size of a conventional disc.  
222  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
Parental lock  
Track log  
Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-or-  
iented scenes feature parental lock which pre-  
vents children from viewing such scenes. With  
this kind of disc, if you set the unit’s parental  
lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for  
children will be disabled, or these scenes will  
be skipped.  
Your navigation system logs routes that you al-  
ready passed through if the track logger is ac-  
tivated. This recorded route is called a “track  
log”. It is handy when you want to check a  
route traveled or if returning along a complex  
route.  
VBR  
Phone book  
VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally  
speaking, CBR (constant bit rate) is more  
widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit  
rate according to the needs of audio compres-  
sion, it is possible to achieve compression-  
priority sound quality.  
An address book on user’s phone is collec-  
tively referred to as “Phone book”. Depending  
on the cellular phone, the phone book may be  
called a name such as “Contacts”, “Business  
card” or something else.  
Point Of Interest (POI)  
Voice guidance  
Any of a range of locations stored in the data,  
such as railway stations, shops, restaurants,  
and amusement parks.  
The giving of directions by navigation voice  
while in guidance.  
Waypoint  
Region number  
A location that you choose to visit before your  
destination; a journey can be built up from  
multiple waypoints and the destination.  
DVD players and DVD discs feature region  
numbers indicating the area in which they  
were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos-  
sible unless it features the same region num-  
ber as the DVD player.  
WMA  
™
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and  
refers to an audio compression technology  
that is developed by Microsoft Corporation.  
Route setting  
The process of determining the ideal route to a  
specific location; route setting is done auto-  
matically by the system when you specify a  
destination.  
Set route  
The route marked out by the system to your  
destination. It is highlighted in bright color on  
the map.  
Title  
DVD-Video discs have a high data capacity, en-  
abling recording of multiple videos on a sin-  
gle disc. If, for example, one disc contains  
three separate videos, they are divided into  
title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the  
convenience of title search and other func-  
tions.  
223  
En  
Appendix  
Appendix  
AVIC-X920BT .................... 6.1 inch wide/16:9  
Effective display area:  
Specifications  
AVIC-Z120BT .................... 159 mm × 84 mm  
AVIC-X920BT .................... 138 mm × 73 mm  
Pixels ............................................. 384 000 (800 × 480)  
Display method ........................ TFT Active matrix driving  
Backlight ..................................... LED  
General  
Rated power source ............... 14.4 V DC  
(allowable voltage range:  
10.8 V to 15.1 V DC)  
Grounding system ................... Negative type  
Color system .............................. NTSC compatible  
Tolerable temperature range:  
Power on ............................ +14 °F to +140 °F  
Power off ............................ –4 °F to +176 °F  
Angle adjustment  
Maximum current consumption  
........................................... 10.0 A  
Dimensions (W × H × D):  
AVIC-Z120BT  
Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 100 mm ×  
AVIC-Z120BT .................... 0° to 22°  
AVIC-X920BT .................... 0°  
165 mm  
(7 in. × 3-7/8 in. × 6-1/2 in.)  
Nose ........................... 170 mm × 96 mm × 17 mm  
(6-3/4 in. × 3-3/4 in. ×  
Audio  
Maximum power output ....... 50 W × 4  
50 W × 2 ch/4 W + 70 W ×  
1 ch/2 W (for subwoofer)  
Continuous power output ... 22 W × 4 (50 Hz to 15 kHz,  
5 %THD, 4 W LOAD, Both  
Channels Driven)  
Load impedance ...................... 4 W (4 W to 8 W [2 W for 1 ch]  
allowable)  
5/8 in.)  
AVIC-X920BT  
Chassis ..................... 178 mm × 100 mm ×  
165 mm  
(7 in. × 3-7/8 in. × 6-1/2 in.)  
Nose ........................... 170 mm × 96 mm × 11 mm  
(6-3/4 in. × 3-3/4 in. ×  
3/8 in.)  
Preout output level (max):  
AVIC-Z120BT .................... 4.0 V  
AVIC-X920BT .................... 2.2 V  
Preout impedance:  
Weight:  
AVIC-Z120BT .................... 2.43 kg (5.3 lbs)  
AVIC-X920BT .................... 2.01 kg (4.4 lbs)  
NAND flash memory ............. 4 GB  
AVIC-Z120BT .................... 100 ohm  
AVIC-X920BT .................... 1 kohm  
Equalizer (7-Band Graphic Equalizer):  
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/125 Hz/315 Hz/800 Hz/  
2 kHz/5 kHz/12.5 kHz  
Navigation  
GPS Receiver:  
System ................................ L1, C/Acode GPS  
SPS (Standard Positioning  
Gain ...................................... 12 dB  
Loudness contour:  
Service)  
Reception system .......... 32-channel multi-channel  
reception system  
Reception frequency .... 1 575.42 MHz  
Sensitivity .......................... –140 dBm (typ)  
Position update frequency  
Low ....................................... +3.5 dB (100 Hz), +3 dB  
(10 kHz)  
Mid ....................................... +10 dB (100 Hz), +6.5 dB  
(10 kHz)  
High ..................................... +11 dB (100 Hz), +11 dB  
(10 kHz)  
........................................... Approx. once per second  
GPS antenna:  
(volume: –30 dB)  
Antenna ............................. Micro strip flat antenna/  
right-handed helical polari-  
zation  
Antenna cable ................. 3.55 m (11 ft. 7 in.)  
Dimensions (W × H × D)  
HPF:  
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/  
125 Hz  
Slope .................................... –12 dB/oct  
Subwoofer:  
........................................... 33 mm × 15 mm × 36 mm  
(1-1/4 in. × 5/8 in. ×  
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/  
125 Hz  
1-3/8 in.)  
Slope .................................... –18 dB/oct  
Gain ...................................... –24/+6 dB  
Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse  
Bass boost:  
Weight ................................ 73.7 g (0.16 lbs)  
Display  
Screen size/aspect ratio:  
Gain ...................................... 0 dB to +12 dB  
AVIC-Z120BT .................... 7 inch wide/16:9  
224  
En  
 
Appendix  
Appendix  
DVD Drive  
SD (AVIC-X920BT)  
System .......................................... DVD-Video, CD, MP3, WMA,  
AAC, DivX system  
microSD card, microSDHC card  
Compatible physical format  
........................................... Version 2.00  
Max memory capacity  
Usable discs .............................. DVD-Video, DVD-R(DL),  
DVD-RW, CD-ROM, CD-DA,  
CD-R/RW  
........................................... 16 GB  
Region number ........................ 1  
Signal format:  
File system ........................ FAT16, FAT32  
Decoding format ............ MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/  
H.264/MPEG4/WMV  
Sampling frequency ..... 44.1 kHz/48 kHz/96 kHz  
Number of quantization bits  
........................................... 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit; linear  
Frequency response ............... 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD,  
at sampling frequency  
Bluetooth  
Version .......................................... Bluetooth 2.0+EDR  
Output power ............................ +4 dBm Max.  
(Power class 2)  
96 kHz)  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 97 dB (1 kHz) (IEC-A net-  
work)  
FM tuner  
(CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IEC-A  
network))  
Dynamic range ......................... 95 dB (1 kHz) (CD: 94 dB  
(1 kHz))  
Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz)  
Output level:  
Frequency range ...................... 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz  
Usable sensitivity ..................... 9 dBf (0.8 µV/75 W, mono,  
S/N: 30 dB)  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 72 dB (IEC-A network)  
Distortion ..................................... 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,  
stereo)  
Video .................................... 1.0 Vp-p/75 W ( 0.2 V)  
Audio ................................... 1.0 V (1 kHz, 0 dB)  
Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo)  
MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3  
WMA decoding format ......... Ver.9.0 L3  
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (only encoded  
by iTunes):  
0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,  
mono)  
Frequency response ............... 30 Hz to 15 000 Hz ( 3 dB)  
Stereo separation .................... 45 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz)  
AM tuner  
Frequency range ...................... 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
(10 kHz)  
.m4a  
DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver.3.11,  
Ver.4.X, Ver.5.X, Ver.6.X :  
Usable sensitivity ..................... 25 µV (S/N: 20 dB)  
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 62 dB (IEC-A network)  
.avi, .divx  
CEA2006 Specifications  
USB  
USB standard spec. ............... USB 2.0 High Speed  
Max current supply ................. 500 mA  
File system .................................. FAT16, FAT32  
USB class .................................... Mass storage class  
Decoding format ...................... MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/  
H.264/MPEG4/WMV  
Power output ............................. 14 W RMS × 4 Channels  
(4 W and ≦ 1 % THD+N)  
S/N ratio ....................................... 91 dBA (reference: 1 W into  
SD (AVIC-Z120BT)  
SD memory card, SDHC memory card  
Compatible physical format  
4 W)  
........................................... Version 2.00  
Max memory capacity  
Note  
........................................... 16 GB  
Specifications and design are subject to possible  
modifications without notice due to im-  
provements.  
File system ........................ FAT16, FAT32  
Decoding format ............ MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/  
H.264/MPEG4/WMV  
225  
En  
226  
En  
227  
En  
PIONEER CORPORATION  
1-1, Shin-Ogura Saiwai-ku, Kawasaki-shi  
Kanagawa-ken 212-0031, JAPAN  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.  
P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.  
TEL: (800) 421-1404  
PIONEER EUROPE NV  
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium/Belgique  
TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.  
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936  
TEL: 65-6472-7555  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.  
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia  
TEL: (03) 9586-6300  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.  
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada  
TEL: 1-877-283-5901  
TEL: 905-479-4411  
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.  
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso  
Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000  
TEL: 55-9178-4270  
先鋒股份有限公司  
總公司 : 台北市中山北路二段44號13樓  
電話 : (02) 2521-3588  
先鋒電子（香港）有限公司  
香港九龍尖沙咀海港城世界商業中心9樓901-6室  
電話 : (0852) 2848-6488  
Published by Pioneer Corporation.  
Copyright © 2010 by Pioneer Corporation.  
All rights reserved.  
<KYTZX> <10A00000>  
<CRB3201-A> UC  

UTStarcom CDM 8625 User Manual
Transcend Information TS16GSSD25S S User Manual
Toshiba MK3019GAX User Manual
SimpleTech SimpleDrive Deluxe User Manual
Seagate MOMENTUS ST9320312AS User Manual
Samsung Cell Phone Galaxy Aviator User Manual
Pyramid Technologies CDR22P User Manual
Pioneer Elite PD D9MK2 K User Manual
Pioneer DEH P3800MP User Manual
Panasonic KX TC18000B User Manual